aboutsummaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/Makefile4
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/TODO48
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/config.cache22
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/config.log12
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/config.status152
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/configure1061
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/configure.in15
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/doc/ecpg.texinfo679
-rwxr-xr-xsrc/interfaces/ecpg/doc/texinfo.tex4053
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/include/Makefile16
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/include/Makefile.in15
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/include/ecpglib.h27
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/include/ecpgtype.h44
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/include/sqlca.h11
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/lib/Makefile24
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/lib/Makefile.in23
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/lib/ecpglib.c609
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/lib/typename.c23
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/Makefile37
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/Makefile.in36
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/ecpg.c16
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/ecpg.in31
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/pgc.l112
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/preproc.y337
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/type.c283
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/type.h51
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/Makefile4
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/Ptest1.c64
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/test1.c60
-rwxr-xr-xsrc/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/test2bin0 -> 71167 bytes
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/test2.c52
-rw-r--r--src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/test2.qc48
32 files changed, 7969 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/Makefile b/src/interfaces/ecpg/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..027f9ea9008
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+SUBDIRS = src/include src/lib src/preproc
+
+all install uninstall clean::
+ for i in $(SUBDIRS); do ( cd $$i; make $@ ); done
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/TODO b/src/interfaces/ecpg/TODO
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..09fd0176be9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/TODO
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+This list is still from Linus. MM
+
+The variables should be static.
+
+The preprocessor interface is strange, to say the least It would be better
+with a consistant unix arguments interface, perhaps builtin default
+filenames so they won't have to be given all the time.
+
+Preprocessor cannot do syntax checking on your SQL statements Whatever you
+write is copied more or less exactly to the postgres95 and you will not be
+able to locate your errors until run-time.
+
+No restriction to strings only The PQ interface, and most of all the PQexec
+function, that is used by the ecpg relies on that the request is built up as
+a string. In some cases, like when the data contains the null character,
+this will be a serious problem.
+
+There should be different error numbers for the different errors instead of
+just -1 for them all.
+
+Missing library functions to_date et al.
+
+Possibility to define records or structs in the declare section in a way
+that the record can be filled from one row in the database. This is a
+simpler way to handle an entire row at a time.
+
+Oracle has array operations that enhances speed. When implementing it in
+ecpg it is done for compatibility reasons only. For them to improve speed
+would require a lot more insight in the postgres internal mechanisms than I
+possess.
+
+Oracle has indicator variables that tell if a value is null or if it is
+empty. This largely simplifies array operations and provides for a way to
+hack around some design flaws in the handling of VARCHAR2 (like that an
+empty string isn't distinguishable from a null value). I am not sure if this
+is an Oracle extension or part of the ANSI standard.
+
+As well as complex types like records and arrays, typedefs would be a good
+thing to take care of.
+
+To set up a database you need a few scripts with table definitions and other
+configuration parameters. If you have these scripts for an old database you
+would like to just apply them to get a postgres database that works in the
+same way. The functionality could be accomplished with some conversion
+scripts. Speed will never be accomplished in this way. To do this you need a
+bigger insight in the database construction and the use of the database than
+could be realised in a script.
+
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/config.cache b/src/interfaces/ecpg/config.cache
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e61189077f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/config.cache
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+# This file is a shell script that caches the results of configure
+# tests run on this system so they can be shared between configure
+# scripts and configure runs. It is not useful on other systems.
+# If it contains results you don't want to keep, you may remove or edit it.
+#
+# By default, configure uses ./config.cache as the cache file,
+# creating it if it does not exist already. You can give configure
+# the --cache-file=FILE option to use a different cache file; that is
+# what configure does when it calls configure scripts in
+# subdirectories, so they share the cache.
+# Giving --cache-file=/dev/null disables caching, for debugging configure.
+# config.status only pays attention to the cache file if you give it the
+# --recheck option to rerun configure.
+#
+ac_cv_lib_fl_yywrap=${ac_cv_lib_fl_yywrap=yes}
+ac_cv_prog_CC=${ac_cv_prog_CC=gcc}
+ac_cv_prog_LEX=${ac_cv_prog_LEX=flex}
+ac_cv_prog_YACC=${ac_cv_prog_YACC='bison -y'}
+ac_cv_prog_cc_cross=${ac_cv_prog_cc_cross=no}
+ac_cv_prog_cc_g=${ac_cv_prog_cc_g=yes}
+ac_cv_prog_cc_works=${ac_cv_prog_cc_works=yes}
+ac_cv_prog_gcc=${ac_cv_prog_gcc=yes}
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/config.log b/src/interfaces/ecpg/config.log
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..57071ad807f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/config.log
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+This file contains any messages produced by compilers while
+running configure, to aid debugging if configure makes a mistake.
+
+configure:526: checking for gcc
+configure:603: checking whether the C compiler (gcc ) works
+configure:617: gcc -o conftest conftest.c 1>&5
+configure:637: checking whether the C compiler (gcc ) is a cross-compiler
+configure:642: checking whether we are using GNU C
+configure:666: checking whether gcc accepts -g
+configure:696: checking for flex
+configure:729: checking for yywrap in -lfl
+configure:775: checking for bison
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/config.status b/src/interfaces/ecpg/config.status
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2e635d2680b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/config.status
@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+# Generated automatically by configure.
+# Run this file to recreate the current configuration.
+# This directory was configured as follows,
+# on host gauss:
+#
+# ./configure
+#
+# Compiler output produced by configure, useful for debugging
+# configure, is in ./config.log if it exists.
+
+ac_cs_usage="Usage: ./config.status [--recheck] [--version] [--help]"
+for ac_option
+do
+ case "$ac_option" in
+ -recheck | --recheck | --rechec | --reche | --rech | --rec | --re | --r)
+ echo "running ${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} ./configure --no-create --no-recursion"
+ exec ${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} ./configure --no-create --no-recursion ;;
+ -version | --version | --versio | --versi | --vers | --ver | --ve | --v)
+ echo "./config.status generated by autoconf version 2.12"
+ exit 0 ;;
+ -help | --help | --hel | --he | --h)
+ echo "$ac_cs_usage"; exit 0 ;;
+ *) echo "$ac_cs_usage"; exit 1 ;;
+ esac
+done
+
+ac_given_srcdir=.
+
+trap 'rm -fr src/include/Makefile src/lib/Makefile src/preproc/Makefile src/preproc/ecpg conftest*; exit 1' 1 2 15
+
+# Protect against being on the right side of a sed subst in config.status.
+sed 's/%@/@@/; s/@%/@@/; s/%g$/@g/; /@g$/s/[\\&%]/\\&/g;
+ s/@@/%@/; s/@@/@%/; s/@g$/%g/' > conftest.subs <<\CEOF
+/^[ ]*VPATH[ ]*=[^:]*$/d
+
+s%@CFLAGS@%-g -O2%g
+s%@CPPFLAGS@%%g
+s%@CXXFLAGS@%%g
+s%@DEFS@% %g
+s%@LDFLAGS@%%g
+s%@LIBS@%%g
+s%@exec_prefix@%${prefix}%g
+s%@prefix@%/usr/local%g
+s%@program_transform_name@%s,x,x,%g
+s%@bindir@%${exec_prefix}/bin%g
+s%@sbindir@%${exec_prefix}/sbin%g
+s%@libexecdir@%${exec_prefix}/libexec%g
+s%@datadir@%${prefix}/share%g
+s%@sysconfdir@%${prefix}/etc%g
+s%@sharedstatedir@%${prefix}/com%g
+s%@localstatedir@%${prefix}/var%g
+s%@libdir@%${exec_prefix}/lib%g
+s%@includedir@%${prefix}/include%g
+s%@oldincludedir@%/usr/include%g
+s%@infodir@%${prefix}/info%g
+s%@mandir@%${prefix}/man%g
+s%@CC@%gcc%g
+s%@LEX@%flex%g
+s%@LEXLIB@%-lfl%g
+s%@YACC@%bison -y%g
+s%@TOPSRC@%/home/meskes/data/computer/databases/postgres/pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/../..%g
+
+CEOF
+
+# Split the substitutions into bite-sized pieces for seds with
+# small command number limits, like on Digital OSF/1 and HP-UX.
+ac_max_sed_cmds=90 # Maximum number of lines to put in a sed script.
+ac_file=1 # Number of current file.
+ac_beg=1 # First line for current file.
+ac_end=$ac_max_sed_cmds # Line after last line for current file.
+ac_more_lines=:
+ac_sed_cmds=""
+while $ac_more_lines; do
+ if test $ac_beg -gt 1; then
+ sed "1,${ac_beg}d; ${ac_end}q" conftest.subs > conftest.s$ac_file
+ else
+ sed "${ac_end}q" conftest.subs > conftest.s$ac_file
+ fi
+ if test ! -s conftest.s$ac_file; then
+ ac_more_lines=false
+ rm -f conftest.s$ac_file
+ else
+ if test -z "$ac_sed_cmds"; then
+ ac_sed_cmds="sed -f conftest.s$ac_file"
+ else
+ ac_sed_cmds="$ac_sed_cmds | sed -f conftest.s$ac_file"
+ fi
+ ac_file=`expr $ac_file + 1`
+ ac_beg=$ac_end
+ ac_end=`expr $ac_end + $ac_max_sed_cmds`
+ fi
+done
+if test -z "$ac_sed_cmds"; then
+ ac_sed_cmds=cat
+fi
+
+CONFIG_FILES=${CONFIG_FILES-"src/include/Makefile src/lib/Makefile src/preproc/Makefile src/preproc/ecpg"}
+for ac_file in .. $CONFIG_FILES; do if test "x$ac_file" != x..; then
+ # Support "outfile[:infile[:infile...]]", defaulting infile="outfile.in".
+ case "$ac_file" in
+ *:*) ac_file_in=`echo "$ac_file"|sed 's%[^:]*:%%'`
+ ac_file=`echo "$ac_file"|sed 's%:.*%%'` ;;
+ *) ac_file_in="${ac_file}.in" ;;
+ esac
+
+ # Adjust a relative srcdir, top_srcdir, and INSTALL for subdirectories.
+
+ # Remove last slash and all that follows it. Not all systems have dirname.
+ ac_dir=`echo $ac_file|sed 's%/[^/][^/]*$%%'`
+ if test "$ac_dir" != "$ac_file" && test "$ac_dir" != .; then
+ # The file is in a subdirectory.
+ test ! -d "$ac_dir" && mkdir "$ac_dir"
+ ac_dir_suffix="/`echo $ac_dir|sed 's%^\./%%'`"
+ # A "../" for each directory in $ac_dir_suffix.
+ ac_dots=`echo $ac_dir_suffix|sed 's%/[^/]*%../%g'`
+ else
+ ac_dir_suffix= ac_dots=
+ fi
+
+ case "$ac_given_srcdir" in
+ .) srcdir=.
+ if test -z "$ac_dots"; then top_srcdir=.
+ else top_srcdir=`echo $ac_dots|sed 's%/$%%'`; fi ;;
+ /*) srcdir="$ac_given_srcdir$ac_dir_suffix"; top_srcdir="$ac_given_srcdir" ;;
+ *) # Relative path.
+ srcdir="$ac_dots$ac_given_srcdir$ac_dir_suffix"
+ top_srcdir="$ac_dots$ac_given_srcdir" ;;
+ esac
+
+
+ echo creating "$ac_file"
+ rm -f "$ac_file"
+ configure_input="Generated automatically from `echo $ac_file_in|sed 's%.*/%%'` by configure."
+ case "$ac_file" in
+ *Makefile*) ac_comsub="1i\\
+# $configure_input" ;;
+ *) ac_comsub= ;;
+ esac
+
+ ac_file_inputs=`echo $ac_file_in|sed -e "s%^%$ac_given_srcdir/%" -e "s%:% $ac_given_srcdir/%g"`
+ sed -e "$ac_comsub
+s%@configure_input@%$configure_input%g
+s%@srcdir@%$srcdir%g
+s%@top_srcdir@%$top_srcdir%g
+" $ac_file_inputs | (eval "$ac_sed_cmds") > $ac_file
+fi; done
+rm -f conftest.s*
+
+
+
+exit 0
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/configure b/src/interfaces/ecpg/configure
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..52843da56db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/configure
@@ -0,0 +1,1061 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+
+# Guess values for system-dependent variables and create Makefiles.
+# Generated automatically using autoconf version 2.12
+# Copyright (C) 1992, 93, 94, 95, 96 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+# This configure script is free software; the Free Software Foundation
+# gives unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it.
+
+# Defaults:
+ac_help=
+ac_default_prefix=/usr/local
+# Any additions from configure.in:
+
+# Initialize some variables set by options.
+# The variables have the same names as the options, with
+# dashes changed to underlines.
+build=NONE
+cache_file=./config.cache
+exec_prefix=NONE
+host=NONE
+no_create=
+nonopt=NONE
+no_recursion=
+prefix=NONE
+program_prefix=NONE
+program_suffix=NONE
+program_transform_name=s,x,x,
+silent=
+site=
+srcdir=
+target=NONE
+verbose=
+x_includes=NONE
+x_libraries=NONE
+bindir='${exec_prefix}/bin'
+sbindir='${exec_prefix}/sbin'
+libexecdir='${exec_prefix}/libexec'
+datadir='${prefix}/share'
+sysconfdir='${prefix}/etc'
+sharedstatedir='${prefix}/com'
+localstatedir='${prefix}/var'
+libdir='${exec_prefix}/lib'
+includedir='${prefix}/include'
+oldincludedir='/usr/include'
+infodir='${prefix}/info'
+mandir='${prefix}/man'
+
+# Initialize some other variables.
+subdirs=
+MFLAGS= MAKEFLAGS=
+# Maximum number of lines to put in a shell here document.
+ac_max_here_lines=12
+
+ac_prev=
+for ac_option
+do
+
+ # If the previous option needs an argument, assign it.
+ if test -n "$ac_prev"; then
+ eval "$ac_prev=\$ac_option"
+ ac_prev=
+ continue
+ fi
+
+ case "$ac_option" in
+ -*=*) ac_optarg=`echo "$ac_option" | sed 's/[-_a-zA-Z0-9]*=//'` ;;
+ *) ac_optarg= ;;
+ esac
+
+ # Accept the important Cygnus configure options, so we can diagnose typos.
+
+ case "$ac_option" in
+
+ -bindir | --bindir | --bindi | --bind | --bin | --bi)
+ ac_prev=bindir ;;
+ -bindir=* | --bindir=* | --bindi=* | --bind=* | --bin=* | --bi=*)
+ bindir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -build | --build | --buil | --bui | --bu)
+ ac_prev=build ;;
+ -build=* | --build=* | --buil=* | --bui=* | --bu=*)
+ build="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -cache-file | --cache-file | --cache-fil | --cache-fi \
+ | --cache-f | --cache- | --cache | --cach | --cac | --ca | --c)
+ ac_prev=cache_file ;;
+ -cache-file=* | --cache-file=* | --cache-fil=* | --cache-fi=* \
+ | --cache-f=* | --cache-=* | --cache=* | --cach=* | --cac=* | --ca=* | --c=*)
+ cache_file="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -datadir | --datadir | --datadi | --datad | --data | --dat | --da)
+ ac_prev=datadir ;;
+ -datadir=* | --datadir=* | --datadi=* | --datad=* | --data=* | --dat=* \
+ | --da=*)
+ datadir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -disable-* | --disable-*)
+ ac_feature=`echo $ac_option|sed -e 's/-*disable-//'`
+ # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names.
+ if test -n "`echo $ac_feature| sed 's/[-a-zA-Z0-9_]//g'`"; then
+ { echo "configure: error: $ac_feature: invalid feature name" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+ fi
+ ac_feature=`echo $ac_feature| sed 's/-/_/g'`
+ eval "enable_${ac_feature}=no" ;;
+
+ -enable-* | --enable-*)
+ ac_feature=`echo $ac_option|sed -e 's/-*enable-//' -e 's/=.*//'`
+ # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names.
+ if test -n "`echo $ac_feature| sed 's/[-_a-zA-Z0-9]//g'`"; then
+ { echo "configure: error: $ac_feature: invalid feature name" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+ fi
+ ac_feature=`echo $ac_feature| sed 's/-/_/g'`
+ case "$ac_option" in
+ *=*) ;;
+ *) ac_optarg=yes ;;
+ esac
+ eval "enable_${ac_feature}='$ac_optarg'" ;;
+
+ -exec-prefix | --exec_prefix | --exec-prefix | --exec-prefi \
+ | --exec-pref | --exec-pre | --exec-pr | --exec-p | --exec- \
+ | --exec | --exe | --ex)
+ ac_prev=exec_prefix ;;
+ -exec-prefix=* | --exec_prefix=* | --exec-prefix=* | --exec-prefi=* \
+ | --exec-pref=* | --exec-pre=* | --exec-pr=* | --exec-p=* | --exec-=* \
+ | --exec=* | --exe=* | --ex=*)
+ exec_prefix="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -gas | --gas | --ga | --g)
+ # Obsolete; use --with-gas.
+ with_gas=yes ;;
+
+ -help | --help | --hel | --he)
+ # Omit some internal or obsolete options to make the list less imposing.
+ # This message is too long to be a string in the A/UX 3.1 sh.
+ cat << EOF
+Usage: configure [options] [host]
+Options: [defaults in brackets after descriptions]
+Configuration:
+ --cache-file=FILE cache test results in FILE
+ --help print this message
+ --no-create do not create output files
+ --quiet, --silent do not print \`checking...' messages
+ --version print the version of autoconf that created configure
+Directory and file names:
+ --prefix=PREFIX install architecture-independent files in PREFIX
+ [$ac_default_prefix]
+ --exec-prefix=EPREFIX install architecture-dependent files in EPREFIX
+ [same as prefix]
+ --bindir=DIR user executables in DIR [EPREFIX/bin]
+ --sbindir=DIR system admin executables in DIR [EPREFIX/sbin]
+ --libexecdir=DIR program executables in DIR [EPREFIX/libexec]
+ --datadir=DIR read-only architecture-independent data in DIR
+ [PREFIX/share]
+ --sysconfdir=DIR read-only single-machine data in DIR [PREFIX/etc]
+ --sharedstatedir=DIR modifiable architecture-independent data in DIR
+ [PREFIX/com]
+ --localstatedir=DIR modifiable single-machine data in DIR [PREFIX/var]
+ --libdir=DIR object code libraries in DIR [EPREFIX/lib]
+ --includedir=DIR C header files in DIR [PREFIX/include]
+ --oldincludedir=DIR C header files for non-gcc in DIR [/usr/include]
+ --infodir=DIR info documentation in DIR [PREFIX/info]
+ --mandir=DIR man documentation in DIR [PREFIX/man]
+ --srcdir=DIR find the sources in DIR [configure dir or ..]
+ --program-prefix=PREFIX prepend PREFIX to installed program names
+ --program-suffix=SUFFIX append SUFFIX to installed program names
+ --program-transform-name=PROGRAM
+ run sed PROGRAM on installed program names
+EOF
+ cat << EOF
+Host type:
+ --build=BUILD configure for building on BUILD [BUILD=HOST]
+ --host=HOST configure for HOST [guessed]
+ --target=TARGET configure for TARGET [TARGET=HOST]
+Features and packages:
+ --disable-FEATURE do not include FEATURE (same as --enable-FEATURE=no)
+ --enable-FEATURE[=ARG] include FEATURE [ARG=yes]
+ --with-PACKAGE[=ARG] use PACKAGE [ARG=yes]
+ --without-PACKAGE do not use PACKAGE (same as --with-PACKAGE=no)
+ --x-includes=DIR X include files are in DIR
+ --x-libraries=DIR X library files are in DIR
+EOF
+ if test -n "$ac_help"; then
+ echo "--enable and --with options recognized:$ac_help"
+ fi
+ exit 0 ;;
+
+ -host | --host | --hos | --ho)
+ ac_prev=host ;;
+ -host=* | --host=* | --hos=* | --ho=*)
+ host="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -includedir | --includedir | --includedi | --included | --include \
+ | --includ | --inclu | --incl | --inc)
+ ac_prev=includedir ;;
+ -includedir=* | --includedir=* | --includedi=* | --included=* | --include=* \
+ | --includ=* | --inclu=* | --incl=* | --inc=*)
+ includedir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -infodir | --infodir | --infodi | --infod | --info | --inf)
+ ac_prev=infodir ;;
+ -infodir=* | --infodir=* | --infodi=* | --infod=* | --info=* | --inf=*)
+ infodir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -libdir | --libdir | --libdi | --libd)
+ ac_prev=libdir ;;
+ -libdir=* | --libdir=* | --libdi=* | --libd=*)
+ libdir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -libexecdir | --libexecdir | --libexecdi | --libexecd | --libexec \
+ | --libexe | --libex | --libe)
+ ac_prev=libexecdir ;;
+ -libexecdir=* | --libexecdir=* | --libexecdi=* | --libexecd=* | --libexec=* \
+ | --libexe=* | --libex=* | --libe=*)
+ libexecdir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -localstatedir | --localstatedir | --localstatedi | --localstated \
+ | --localstate | --localstat | --localsta | --localst \
+ | --locals | --local | --loca | --loc | --lo)
+ ac_prev=localstatedir ;;
+ -localstatedir=* | --localstatedir=* | --localstatedi=* | --localstated=* \
+ | --localstate=* | --localstat=* | --localsta=* | --localst=* \
+ | --locals=* | --local=* | --loca=* | --loc=* | --lo=*)
+ localstatedir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -mandir | --mandir | --mandi | --mand | --man | --ma | --m)
+ ac_prev=mandir ;;
+ -mandir=* | --mandir=* | --mandi=* | --mand=* | --man=* | --ma=* | --m=*)
+ mandir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -nfp | --nfp | --nf)
+ # Obsolete; use --without-fp.
+ with_fp=no ;;
+
+ -no-create | --no-create | --no-creat | --no-crea | --no-cre \
+ | --no-cr | --no-c)
+ no_create=yes ;;
+
+ -no-recursion | --no-recursion | --no-recursio | --no-recursi \
+ | --no-recurs | --no-recur | --no-recu | --no-rec | --no-re | --no-r)
+ no_recursion=yes ;;
+
+ -oldincludedir | --oldincludedir | --oldincludedi | --oldincluded \
+ | --oldinclude | --oldinclud | --oldinclu | --oldincl | --oldinc \
+ | --oldin | --oldi | --old | --ol | --o)
+ ac_prev=oldincludedir ;;
+ -oldincludedir=* | --oldincludedir=* | --oldincludedi=* | --oldincluded=* \
+ | --oldinclude=* | --oldinclud=* | --oldinclu=* | --oldincl=* | --oldinc=* \
+ | --oldin=* | --oldi=* | --old=* | --ol=* | --o=*)
+ oldincludedir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -prefix | --prefix | --prefi | --pref | --pre | --pr | --p)
+ ac_prev=prefix ;;
+ -prefix=* | --prefix=* | --prefi=* | --pref=* | --pre=* | --pr=* | --p=*)
+ prefix="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -program-prefix | --program-prefix | --program-prefi | --program-pref \
+ | --program-pre | --program-pr | --program-p)
+ ac_prev=program_prefix ;;
+ -program-prefix=* | --program-prefix=* | --program-prefi=* \
+ | --program-pref=* | --program-pre=* | --program-pr=* | --program-p=*)
+ program_prefix="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -program-suffix | --program-suffix | --program-suffi | --program-suff \
+ | --program-suf | --program-su | --program-s)
+ ac_prev=program_suffix ;;
+ -program-suffix=* | --program-suffix=* | --program-suffi=* \
+ | --program-suff=* | --program-suf=* | --program-su=* | --program-s=*)
+ program_suffix="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -program-transform-name | --program-transform-name \
+ | --program-transform-nam | --program-transform-na \
+ | --program-transform-n | --program-transform- \
+ | --program-transform | --program-transfor \
+ | --program-transfo | --program-transf \
+ | --program-trans | --program-tran \
+ | --progr-tra | --program-tr | --program-t)
+ ac_prev=program_transform_name ;;
+ -program-transform-name=* | --program-transform-name=* \
+ | --program-transform-nam=* | --program-transform-na=* \
+ | --program-transform-n=* | --program-transform-=* \
+ | --program-transform=* | --program-transfor=* \
+ | --program-transfo=* | --program-transf=* \
+ | --program-trans=* | --program-tran=* \
+ | --progr-tra=* | --program-tr=* | --program-t=*)
+ program_transform_name="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -q | -quiet | --quiet | --quie | --qui | --qu | --q \
+ | -silent | --silent | --silen | --sile | --sil)
+ silent=yes ;;
+
+ -sbindir | --sbindir | --sbindi | --sbind | --sbin | --sbi | --sb)
+ ac_prev=sbindir ;;
+ -sbindir=* | --sbindir=* | --sbindi=* | --sbind=* | --sbin=* \
+ | --sbi=* | --sb=*)
+ sbindir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -sharedstatedir | --sharedstatedir | --sharedstatedi \
+ | --sharedstated | --sharedstate | --sharedstat | --sharedsta \
+ | --sharedst | --shareds | --shared | --share | --shar \
+ | --sha | --sh)
+ ac_prev=sharedstatedir ;;
+ -sharedstatedir=* | --sharedstatedir=* | --sharedstatedi=* \
+ | --sharedstated=* | --sharedstate=* | --sharedstat=* | --sharedsta=* \
+ | --sharedst=* | --shareds=* | --shared=* | --share=* | --shar=* \
+ | --sha=* | --sh=*)
+ sharedstatedir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -site | --site | --sit)
+ ac_prev=site ;;
+ -site=* | --site=* | --sit=*)
+ site="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -srcdir | --srcdir | --srcdi | --srcd | --src | --sr)
+ ac_prev=srcdir ;;
+ -srcdir=* | --srcdir=* | --srcdi=* | --srcd=* | --src=* | --sr=*)
+ srcdir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -sysconfdir | --sysconfdir | --sysconfdi | --sysconfd | --sysconf \
+ | --syscon | --sysco | --sysc | --sys | --sy)
+ ac_prev=sysconfdir ;;
+ -sysconfdir=* | --sysconfdir=* | --sysconfdi=* | --sysconfd=* | --sysconf=* \
+ | --syscon=* | --sysco=* | --sysc=* | --sys=* | --sy=*)
+ sysconfdir="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -target | --target | --targe | --targ | --tar | --ta | --t)
+ ac_prev=target ;;
+ -target=* | --target=* | --targe=* | --targ=* | --tar=* | --ta=* | --t=*)
+ target="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -v | -verbose | --verbose | --verbos | --verbo | --verb)
+ verbose=yes ;;
+
+ -version | --version | --versio | --versi | --vers)
+ echo "configure generated by autoconf version 2.12"
+ exit 0 ;;
+
+ -with-* | --with-*)
+ ac_package=`echo $ac_option|sed -e 's/-*with-//' -e 's/=.*//'`
+ # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names.
+ if test -n "`echo $ac_package| sed 's/[-_a-zA-Z0-9]//g'`"; then
+ { echo "configure: error: $ac_package: invalid package name" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+ fi
+ ac_package=`echo $ac_package| sed 's/-/_/g'`
+ case "$ac_option" in
+ *=*) ;;
+ *) ac_optarg=yes ;;
+ esac
+ eval "with_${ac_package}='$ac_optarg'" ;;
+
+ -without-* | --without-*)
+ ac_package=`echo $ac_option|sed -e 's/-*without-//'`
+ # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names.
+ if test -n "`echo $ac_package| sed 's/[-a-zA-Z0-9_]//g'`"; then
+ { echo "configure: error: $ac_package: invalid package name" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+ fi
+ ac_package=`echo $ac_package| sed 's/-/_/g'`
+ eval "with_${ac_package}=no" ;;
+
+ --x)
+ # Obsolete; use --with-x.
+ with_x=yes ;;
+
+ -x-includes | --x-includes | --x-include | --x-includ | --x-inclu \
+ | --x-incl | --x-inc | --x-in | --x-i)
+ ac_prev=x_includes ;;
+ -x-includes=* | --x-includes=* | --x-include=* | --x-includ=* | --x-inclu=* \
+ | --x-incl=* | --x-inc=* | --x-in=* | --x-i=*)
+ x_includes="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -x-libraries | --x-libraries | --x-librarie | --x-librari \
+ | --x-librar | --x-libra | --x-libr | --x-lib | --x-li | --x-l)
+ ac_prev=x_libraries ;;
+ -x-libraries=* | --x-libraries=* | --x-librarie=* | --x-librari=* \
+ | --x-librar=* | --x-libra=* | --x-libr=* | --x-lib=* | --x-li=* | --x-l=*)
+ x_libraries="$ac_optarg" ;;
+
+ -*) { echo "configure: error: $ac_option: invalid option; use --help to show usage" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+ ;;
+
+ *)
+ if test -n "`echo $ac_option| sed 's/[-a-z0-9.]//g'`"; then
+ echo "configure: warning: $ac_option: invalid host type" 1>&2
+ fi
+ if test "x$nonopt" != xNONE; then
+ { echo "configure: error: can only configure for one host and one target at a time" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+ fi
+ nonopt="$ac_option"
+ ;;
+
+ esac
+done
+
+if test -n "$ac_prev"; then
+ { echo "configure: error: missing argument to --`echo $ac_prev | sed 's/_/-/g'`" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+fi
+
+trap 'rm -fr conftest* confdefs* core core.* *.core $ac_clean_files; exit 1' 1 2 15
+
+# File descriptor usage:
+# 0 standard input
+# 1 file creation
+# 2 errors and warnings
+# 3 some systems may open it to /dev/tty
+# 4 used on the Kubota Titan
+# 6 checking for... messages and results
+# 5 compiler messages saved in config.log
+if test "$silent" = yes; then
+ exec 6>/dev/null
+else
+ exec 6>&1
+fi
+exec 5>./config.log
+
+echo "\
+This file contains any messages produced by compilers while
+running configure, to aid debugging if configure makes a mistake.
+" 1>&5
+
+# Strip out --no-create and --no-recursion so they do not pile up.
+# Also quote any args containing shell metacharacters.
+ac_configure_args=
+for ac_arg
+do
+ case "$ac_arg" in
+ -no-create | --no-create | --no-creat | --no-crea | --no-cre \
+ | --no-cr | --no-c) ;;
+ -no-recursion | --no-recursion | --no-recursio | --no-recursi \
+ | --no-recurs | --no-recur | --no-recu | --no-rec | --no-re | --no-r) ;;
+ *" "*|*" "*|*[\[\]\~\#\$\^\&\*\(\)\{\}\\\|\;\<\>\?]*)
+ ac_configure_args="$ac_configure_args '$ac_arg'" ;;
+ *) ac_configure_args="$ac_configure_args $ac_arg" ;;
+ esac
+done
+
+# NLS nuisances.
+# Only set these to C if already set. These must not be set unconditionally
+# because not all systems understand e.g. LANG=C (notably SCO).
+# Fixing LC_MESSAGES prevents Solaris sh from translating var values in `set'!
+# Non-C LC_CTYPE values break the ctype check.
+if test "${LANG+set}" = set; then LANG=C; export LANG; fi
+if test "${LC_ALL+set}" = set; then LC_ALL=C; export LC_ALL; fi
+if test "${LC_MESSAGES+set}" = set; then LC_MESSAGES=C; export LC_MESSAGES; fi
+if test "${LC_CTYPE+set}" = set; then LC_CTYPE=C; export LC_CTYPE; fi
+
+# confdefs.h avoids OS command line length limits that DEFS can exceed.
+rm -rf conftest* confdefs.h
+# AIX cpp loses on an empty file, so make sure it contains at least a newline.
+echo > confdefs.h
+
+# A filename unique to this package, relative to the directory that
+# configure is in, which we can look for to find out if srcdir is correct.
+ac_unique_file=src/preproc/type.c
+
+# Find the source files, if location was not specified.
+if test -z "$srcdir"; then
+ ac_srcdir_defaulted=yes
+ # Try the directory containing this script, then its parent.
+ ac_prog=$0
+ ac_confdir=`echo $ac_prog|sed 's%/[^/][^/]*$%%'`
+ test "x$ac_confdir" = "x$ac_prog" && ac_confdir=.
+ srcdir=$ac_confdir
+ if test ! -r $srcdir/$ac_unique_file; then
+ srcdir=..
+ fi
+else
+ ac_srcdir_defaulted=no
+fi
+if test ! -r $srcdir/$ac_unique_file; then
+ if test "$ac_srcdir_defaulted" = yes; then
+ { echo "configure: error: can not find sources in $ac_confdir or .." 1>&2; exit 1; }
+ else
+ { echo "configure: error: can not find sources in $srcdir" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+ fi
+fi
+srcdir=`echo "${srcdir}" | sed 's%\([^/]\)/*$%\1%'`
+
+# Prefer explicitly selected file to automatically selected ones.
+if test -z "$CONFIG_SITE"; then
+ if test "x$prefix" != xNONE; then
+ CONFIG_SITE="$prefix/share/config.site $prefix/etc/config.site"
+ else
+ CONFIG_SITE="$ac_default_prefix/share/config.site $ac_default_prefix/etc/config.site"
+ fi
+fi
+for ac_site_file in $CONFIG_SITE; do
+ if test -r "$ac_site_file"; then
+ echo "loading site script $ac_site_file"
+ . "$ac_site_file"
+ fi
+done
+
+if test -r "$cache_file"; then
+ echo "loading cache $cache_file"
+ . $cache_file
+else
+ echo "creating cache $cache_file"
+ > $cache_file
+fi
+
+ac_ext=c
+# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
+ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
+
+if (echo "testing\c"; echo 1,2,3) | grep c >/dev/null; then
+ # Stardent Vistra SVR4 grep lacks -e, says ghazi@caip.rutgers.edu.
+ if (echo -n testing; echo 1,2,3) | sed s/-n/xn/ | grep xn >/dev/null; then
+ ac_n= ac_c='
+' ac_t=' '
+ else
+ ac_n=-n ac_c= ac_t=
+ fi
+else
+ ac_n= ac_c='\c' ac_t=
+fi
+
+
+
+# Extract the first word of "gcc", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy gcc; ac_word=$2
+echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:526: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_CC'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+ echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+ if test -n "$CC"; then
+ ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+ IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:"
+ for ac_dir in $PATH; do
+ test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
+ if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then
+ ac_cv_prog_CC="gcc"
+ break
+ fi
+ done
+ IFS="$ac_save_ifs"
+fi
+fi
+CC="$ac_cv_prog_CC"
+if test -n "$CC"; then
+ echo "$ac_t""$CC" 1>&6
+else
+ echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+fi
+
+if test -z "$CC"; then
+ # Extract the first word of "cc", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy cc; ac_word=$2
+echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:555: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_CC'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+ echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+ if test -n "$CC"; then
+ ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+ IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:"
+ ac_prog_rejected=no
+ for ac_dir in $PATH; do
+ test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
+ if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then
+ if test "$ac_dir/$ac_word" = "/usr/ucb/cc"; then
+ ac_prog_rejected=yes
+ continue
+ fi
+ ac_cv_prog_CC="cc"
+ break
+ fi
+ done
+ IFS="$ac_save_ifs"
+if test $ac_prog_rejected = yes; then
+ # We found a bogon in the path, so make sure we never use it.
+ set dummy $ac_cv_prog_CC
+ shift
+ if test $# -gt 0; then
+ # We chose a different compiler from the bogus one.
+ # However, it has the same basename, so the bogon will be chosen
+ # first if we set CC to just the basename; use the full file name.
+ shift
+ set dummy "$ac_dir/$ac_word" "$@"
+ shift
+ ac_cv_prog_CC="$@"
+ fi
+fi
+fi
+fi
+CC="$ac_cv_prog_CC"
+if test -n "$CC"; then
+ echo "$ac_t""$CC" 1>&6
+else
+ echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+fi
+
+ test -z "$CC" && { echo "configure: error: no acceptable cc found in \$PATH" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+fi
+
+echo $ac_n "checking whether the C compiler ($CC $CFLAGS $LDFLAGS) works""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:603: checking whether the C compiler ($CC $CFLAGS $LDFLAGS) works" >&5
+
+ac_ext=c
+# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
+ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
+
+cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 613 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+main(){return(0);}
+EOF
+if { (eval echo configure:617: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest; then
+ ac_cv_prog_cc_works=yes
+ # If we can't run a trivial program, we are probably using a cross compiler.
+ if (./conftest; exit) 2>/dev/null; then
+ ac_cv_prog_cc_cross=no
+ else
+ ac_cv_prog_cc_cross=yes
+ fi
+else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+ ac_cv_prog_cc_works=no
+fi
+rm -fr conftest*
+
+echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_cc_works" 1>&6
+if test $ac_cv_prog_cc_works = no; then
+ { echo "configure: error: installation or configuration problem: C compiler cannot create executables." 1>&2; exit 1; }
+fi
+echo $ac_n "checking whether the C compiler ($CC $CFLAGS $LDFLAGS) is a cross-compiler""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:637: checking whether the C compiler ($CC $CFLAGS $LDFLAGS) is a cross-compiler" >&5
+echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross" 1>&6
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
+
+echo $ac_n "checking whether we are using GNU C""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:642: checking whether we are using GNU C" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_gcc'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+ echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+ cat > conftest.c <<EOF
+#ifdef __GNUC__
+ yes;
+#endif
+EOF
+if { ac_try='${CC-cc} -E conftest.c'; { (eval echo configure:651: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }; } | egrep yes >/dev/null 2>&1; then
+ ac_cv_prog_gcc=yes
+else
+ ac_cv_prog_gcc=no
+fi
+fi
+
+echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_gcc" 1>&6
+
+if test $ac_cv_prog_gcc = yes; then
+ GCC=yes
+ ac_test_CFLAGS="${CFLAGS+set}"
+ ac_save_CFLAGS="$CFLAGS"
+ CFLAGS=
+ echo $ac_n "checking whether ${CC-cc} accepts -g""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:666: checking whether ${CC-cc} accepts -g" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_cc_g'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+ echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+ echo 'void f(){}' > conftest.c
+if test -z "`${CC-cc} -g -c conftest.c 2>&1`"; then
+ ac_cv_prog_cc_g=yes
+else
+ ac_cv_prog_cc_g=no
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+
+fi
+
+echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_cc_g" 1>&6
+ if test "$ac_test_CFLAGS" = set; then
+ CFLAGS="$ac_save_CFLAGS"
+ elif test $ac_cv_prog_cc_g = yes; then
+ CFLAGS="-g -O2"
+ else
+ CFLAGS="-O2"
+ fi
+else
+ GCC=
+ test "${CFLAGS+set}" = set || CFLAGS="-g"
+fi
+
+# Extract the first word of "flex", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy flex; ac_word=$2
+echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:696: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_LEX'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+ echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+ if test -n "$LEX"; then
+ ac_cv_prog_LEX="$LEX" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+ IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:"
+ for ac_dir in $PATH; do
+ test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
+ if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then
+ ac_cv_prog_LEX="flex"
+ break
+ fi
+ done
+ IFS="$ac_save_ifs"
+ test -z "$ac_cv_prog_LEX" && ac_cv_prog_LEX="lex"
+fi
+fi
+LEX="$ac_cv_prog_LEX"
+if test -n "$LEX"; then
+ echo "$ac_t""$LEX" 1>&6
+else
+ echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+fi
+
+if test -z "$LEXLIB"
+then
+ case "$LEX" in
+ flex*) ac_lib=fl ;;
+ *) ac_lib=l ;;
+ esac
+ echo $ac_n "checking for yywrap in -l$ac_lib""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:729: checking for yywrap in -l$ac_lib" >&5
+ac_lib_var=`echo $ac_lib'_'yywrap | sed 'y%./+-%__p_%'`
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_lib_$ac_lib_var'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+ echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+ ac_save_LIBS="$LIBS"
+LIBS="-l$ac_lib $LIBS"
+cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 737 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+/* Override any gcc2 internal prototype to avoid an error. */
+/* We use char because int might match the return type of a gcc2
+ builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply. */
+char yywrap();
+
+int main() {
+yywrap()
+; return 0; }
+EOF
+if { (eval echo configure:748: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest; then
+ rm -rf conftest*
+ eval "ac_cv_lib_$ac_lib_var=yes"
+else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+ rm -rf conftest*
+ eval "ac_cv_lib_$ac_lib_var=no"
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+LIBS="$ac_save_LIBS"
+
+fi
+if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_lib_'$ac_lib_var`\" = yes"; then
+ echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
+ LEXLIB="-l$ac_lib"
+else
+ echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+fi
+
+fi
+
+for ac_prog in 'bison -y' byacc
+do
+# Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2
+echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:775: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_YACC'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+ echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+ if test -n "$YACC"; then
+ ac_cv_prog_YACC="$YACC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+ IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:"
+ for ac_dir in $PATH; do
+ test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
+ if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then
+ ac_cv_prog_YACC="$ac_prog"
+ break
+ fi
+ done
+ IFS="$ac_save_ifs"
+fi
+fi
+YACC="$ac_cv_prog_YACC"
+if test -n "$YACC"; then
+ echo "$ac_t""$YACC" 1>&6
+else
+ echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+fi
+
+test -n "$YACC" && break
+done
+test -n "$YACC" || YACC="yacc"
+
+
+TOPSRC=`pwd`/../..
+
+
+
+trap '' 1 2 15
+cat > confcache <<\EOF
+# This file is a shell script that caches the results of configure
+# tests run on this system so they can be shared between configure
+# scripts and configure runs. It is not useful on other systems.
+# If it contains results you don't want to keep, you may remove or edit it.
+#
+# By default, configure uses ./config.cache as the cache file,
+# creating it if it does not exist already. You can give configure
+# the --cache-file=FILE option to use a different cache file; that is
+# what configure does when it calls configure scripts in
+# subdirectories, so they share the cache.
+# Giving --cache-file=/dev/null disables caching, for debugging configure.
+# config.status only pays attention to the cache file if you give it the
+# --recheck option to rerun configure.
+#
+EOF
+# The following way of writing the cache mishandles newlines in values,
+# but we know of no workaround that is simple, portable, and efficient.
+# So, don't put newlines in cache variables' values.
+# Ultrix sh set writes to stderr and can't be redirected directly,
+# and sets the high bit in the cache file unless we assign to the vars.
+(set) 2>&1 |
+ case `(ac_space=' '; set) 2>&1` in
+ *ac_space=\ *)
+ # `set' does not quote correctly, so add quotes (double-quote substitution
+ # turns \\\\ into \\, and sed turns \\ into \).
+ sed -n \
+ -e "s/'/'\\\\''/g" \
+ -e "s/^\\([a-zA-Z0-9_]*_cv_[a-zA-Z0-9_]*\\)=\\(.*\\)/\\1=\${\\1='\\2'}/p"
+ ;;
+ *)
+ # `set' quotes correctly as required by POSIX, so do not add quotes.
+ sed -n -e 's/^\([a-zA-Z0-9_]*_cv_[a-zA-Z0-9_]*\)=\(.*\)/\1=${\1=\2}/p'
+ ;;
+ esac >> confcache
+if cmp -s $cache_file confcache; then
+ :
+else
+ if test -w $cache_file; then
+ echo "updating cache $cache_file"
+ cat confcache > $cache_file
+ else
+ echo "not updating unwritable cache $cache_file"
+ fi
+fi
+rm -f confcache
+
+trap 'rm -fr conftest* confdefs* core core.* *.core $ac_clean_files; exit 1' 1 2 15
+
+test "x$prefix" = xNONE && prefix=$ac_default_prefix
+# Let make expand exec_prefix.
+test "x$exec_prefix" = xNONE && exec_prefix='${prefix}'
+
+# Any assignment to VPATH causes Sun make to only execute
+# the first set of double-colon rules, so remove it if not needed.
+# If there is a colon in the path, we need to keep it.
+if test "x$srcdir" = x.; then
+ ac_vpsub='/^[ ]*VPATH[ ]*=[^:]*$/d'
+fi
+
+trap 'rm -f $CONFIG_STATUS conftest*; exit 1' 1 2 15
+
+# Transform confdefs.h into DEFS.
+# Protect against shell expansion while executing Makefile rules.
+# Protect against Makefile macro expansion.
+cat > conftest.defs <<\EOF
+s%#define \([A-Za-z_][A-Za-z0-9_]*\) *\(.*\)%-D\1=\2%g
+s%[ `~#$^&*(){}\\|;'"<>?]%\\&%g
+s%\[%\\&%g
+s%\]%\\&%g
+s%\$%$$%g
+EOF
+DEFS=`sed -f conftest.defs confdefs.h | tr '\012' ' '`
+rm -f conftest.defs
+
+
+# Without the "./", some shells look in PATH for config.status.
+: ${CONFIG_STATUS=./config.status}
+
+echo creating $CONFIG_STATUS
+rm -f $CONFIG_STATUS
+cat > $CONFIG_STATUS <<EOF
+#! /bin/sh
+# Generated automatically by configure.
+# Run this file to recreate the current configuration.
+# This directory was configured as follows,
+# on host `(hostname || uname -n) 2>/dev/null | sed 1q`:
+#
+# $0 $ac_configure_args
+#
+# Compiler output produced by configure, useful for debugging
+# configure, is in ./config.log if it exists.
+
+ac_cs_usage="Usage: $CONFIG_STATUS [--recheck] [--version] [--help]"
+for ac_option
+do
+ case "\$ac_option" in
+ -recheck | --recheck | --rechec | --reche | --rech | --rec | --re | --r)
+ echo "running \${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $0 $ac_configure_args --no-create --no-recursion"
+ exec \${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $0 $ac_configure_args --no-create --no-recursion ;;
+ -version | --version | --versio | --versi | --vers | --ver | --ve | --v)
+ echo "$CONFIG_STATUS generated by autoconf version 2.12"
+ exit 0 ;;
+ -help | --help | --hel | --he | --h)
+ echo "\$ac_cs_usage"; exit 0 ;;
+ *) echo "\$ac_cs_usage"; exit 1 ;;
+ esac
+done
+
+ac_given_srcdir=$srcdir
+
+trap 'rm -fr `echo "src/include/Makefile src/lib/Makefile src/preproc/Makefile src/preproc/ecpg" | sed "s/:[^ ]*//g"` conftest*; exit 1' 1 2 15
+EOF
+cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <<EOF
+
+# Protect against being on the right side of a sed subst in config.status.
+sed 's/%@/@@/; s/@%/@@/; s/%g\$/@g/; /@g\$/s/[\\\\&%]/\\\\&/g;
+ s/@@/%@/; s/@@/@%/; s/@g\$/%g/' > conftest.subs <<\\CEOF
+$ac_vpsub
+$extrasub
+s%@CFLAGS@%$CFLAGS%g
+s%@CPPFLAGS@%$CPPFLAGS%g
+s%@CXXFLAGS@%$CXXFLAGS%g
+s%@DEFS@%$DEFS%g
+s%@LDFLAGS@%$LDFLAGS%g
+s%@LIBS@%$LIBS%g
+s%@exec_prefix@%$exec_prefix%g
+s%@prefix@%$prefix%g
+s%@program_transform_name@%$program_transform_name%g
+s%@bindir@%$bindir%g
+s%@sbindir@%$sbindir%g
+s%@libexecdir@%$libexecdir%g
+s%@datadir@%$datadir%g
+s%@sysconfdir@%$sysconfdir%g
+s%@sharedstatedir@%$sharedstatedir%g
+s%@localstatedir@%$localstatedir%g
+s%@libdir@%$libdir%g
+s%@includedir@%$includedir%g
+s%@oldincludedir@%$oldincludedir%g
+s%@infodir@%$infodir%g
+s%@mandir@%$mandir%g
+s%@CC@%$CC%g
+s%@LEX@%$LEX%g
+s%@LEXLIB@%$LEXLIB%g
+s%@YACC@%$YACC%g
+s%@TOPSRC@%$TOPSRC%g
+
+CEOF
+EOF
+
+cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <<\EOF
+
+# Split the substitutions into bite-sized pieces for seds with
+# small command number limits, like on Digital OSF/1 and HP-UX.
+ac_max_sed_cmds=90 # Maximum number of lines to put in a sed script.
+ac_file=1 # Number of current file.
+ac_beg=1 # First line for current file.
+ac_end=$ac_max_sed_cmds # Line after last line for current file.
+ac_more_lines=:
+ac_sed_cmds=""
+while $ac_more_lines; do
+ if test $ac_beg -gt 1; then
+ sed "1,${ac_beg}d; ${ac_end}q" conftest.subs > conftest.s$ac_file
+ else
+ sed "${ac_end}q" conftest.subs > conftest.s$ac_file
+ fi
+ if test ! -s conftest.s$ac_file; then
+ ac_more_lines=false
+ rm -f conftest.s$ac_file
+ else
+ if test -z "$ac_sed_cmds"; then
+ ac_sed_cmds="sed -f conftest.s$ac_file"
+ else
+ ac_sed_cmds="$ac_sed_cmds | sed -f conftest.s$ac_file"
+ fi
+ ac_file=`expr $ac_file + 1`
+ ac_beg=$ac_end
+ ac_end=`expr $ac_end + $ac_max_sed_cmds`
+ fi
+done
+if test -z "$ac_sed_cmds"; then
+ ac_sed_cmds=cat
+fi
+EOF
+
+cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <<EOF
+
+CONFIG_FILES=\${CONFIG_FILES-"src/include/Makefile src/lib/Makefile src/preproc/Makefile src/preproc/ecpg"}
+EOF
+cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <<\EOF
+for ac_file in .. $CONFIG_FILES; do if test "x$ac_file" != x..; then
+ # Support "outfile[:infile[:infile...]]", defaulting infile="outfile.in".
+ case "$ac_file" in
+ *:*) ac_file_in=`echo "$ac_file"|sed 's%[^:]*:%%'`
+ ac_file=`echo "$ac_file"|sed 's%:.*%%'` ;;
+ *) ac_file_in="${ac_file}.in" ;;
+ esac
+
+ # Adjust a relative srcdir, top_srcdir, and INSTALL for subdirectories.
+
+ # Remove last slash and all that follows it. Not all systems have dirname.
+ ac_dir=`echo $ac_file|sed 's%/[^/][^/]*$%%'`
+ if test "$ac_dir" != "$ac_file" && test "$ac_dir" != .; then
+ # The file is in a subdirectory.
+ test ! -d "$ac_dir" && mkdir "$ac_dir"
+ ac_dir_suffix="/`echo $ac_dir|sed 's%^\./%%'`"
+ # A "../" for each directory in $ac_dir_suffix.
+ ac_dots=`echo $ac_dir_suffix|sed 's%/[^/]*%../%g'`
+ else
+ ac_dir_suffix= ac_dots=
+ fi
+
+ case "$ac_given_srcdir" in
+ .) srcdir=.
+ if test -z "$ac_dots"; then top_srcdir=.
+ else top_srcdir=`echo $ac_dots|sed 's%/$%%'`; fi ;;
+ /*) srcdir="$ac_given_srcdir$ac_dir_suffix"; top_srcdir="$ac_given_srcdir" ;;
+ *) # Relative path.
+ srcdir="$ac_dots$ac_given_srcdir$ac_dir_suffix"
+ top_srcdir="$ac_dots$ac_given_srcdir" ;;
+ esac
+
+
+ echo creating "$ac_file"
+ rm -f "$ac_file"
+ configure_input="Generated automatically from `echo $ac_file_in|sed 's%.*/%%'` by configure."
+ case "$ac_file" in
+ *Makefile*) ac_comsub="1i\\
+# $configure_input" ;;
+ *) ac_comsub= ;;
+ esac
+
+ ac_file_inputs=`echo $ac_file_in|sed -e "s%^%$ac_given_srcdir/%" -e "s%:% $ac_given_srcdir/%g"`
+ sed -e "$ac_comsub
+s%@configure_input@%$configure_input%g
+s%@srcdir@%$srcdir%g
+s%@top_srcdir@%$top_srcdir%g
+" $ac_file_inputs | (eval "$ac_sed_cmds") > $ac_file
+fi; done
+rm -f conftest.s*
+
+EOF
+cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <<EOF
+
+EOF
+cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <<\EOF
+
+exit 0
+EOF
+chmod +x $CONFIG_STATUS
+rm -fr confdefs* $ac_clean_files
+test "$no_create" = yes || ${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $CONFIG_STATUS || exit 1
+
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/configure.in b/src/interfaces/ecpg/configure.in
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..30d972be1e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/configure.in
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+dnl Process this file with autoconf to produce a configure script.
+AC_INIT(src/preproc/type.c)
+
+AC_PROG_CC
+AC_PROG_LEX
+AC_PROG_YACC
+
+dnl This is actually not pwd, it is the location of the configure file.
+dnl This handling, and the fact that not all Makefiles are created by
+dnl this configure script makes it impossible to compile somewhere else.
+[TOPSRC=`pwd`/../..]
+
+AC_SUBST(TOPSRC)
+
+AC_OUTPUT(src/include/Makefile src/lib/Makefile src/preproc/Makefile src/preproc/ecpg)
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/doc/ecpg.texinfo b/src/interfaces/ecpg/doc/ecpg.texinfo
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a76bc8b2a5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/doc/ecpg.texinfo
@@ -0,0 +1,679 @@
+\input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
+@c %**start of header
+@setfilename ecpg
+@settitle Ecpg - Embedded SQL in C for Postgres95
+@setchapternewpage odd
+@c %**end of header
+
+@ifinfo
+This file documents an embedded SQL in C package for Postgres 95.
+
+Copyright 1996 Linus Tolke
+
+Permission is granted to copy and use in the same way as you are allowed
+to copy and use the rest of the Postgres 95.
+@end ifinfo
+
+@c This title page illustrates only one of the
+@c two methods of forming a title page.
+
+@titlepage
+@title ECPG
+@subtitle Embedded SQL in C for Postgres95
+@author Linus Tolke
+
+@c The following two commands
+@c start the copyright page.
+@page
+@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
+Copyright @copyright{} 1996 Linus Tolke
+
+Published by Linus Tolke
+
+Permission is granted to copy and use in the same way as you are allowed
+to copy and use the rest of the Postgres 95.
+@end titlepage
+
+@node Top, Why embedded SQL, (dir), (dir)
+@comment node-name, next, previous, up
+
+@ifinfo
+Ecpg is an embedded sql preprocessor for C and library for Postgres95.
+
+It is written by Linus Tolke <linus@@epact.se>
+
+This texinfo page and the code is all the documentation you get. There
+will not be any separate manual page, installation description or
+buglist.
+@end ifinfo
+
+@menu
+* Why embedded SQL::
+* Simple description of the concept::
+* How to use it::
+* How it works::
+* Limitations::
+* Porting from other DBMSs::
+* Installation::
+* Index::
+
+ --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
+
+How to use it
+
+* Preprocessor::
+* Library::
+* Error handling::
+
+How it works
+
+* The preprocessor::
+* A complete example::
+* The library::
+
+Limitations
+
+* What can be done with this concept::
+* What will never be included and why::
+@end menu
+
+@node Why embedded SQL, Simple description of the concept, Top, Top
+@comment node-name, next, previous, up
+@chapter Why embedded SQL
+
+Embedded SQL has some small advantages over other ways to handle SQL
+queries. It takes care of all the tidious moving of information to and
+from variables in your c-program.
+
+There is an ANSI-standard describing how the embedded language should
+work. Most embedded sql preprocessors I have seen and heard of makes
+extensions so it is difficult to obtain portability even between them
+anyway. I have not read the standard but I hope that my implementation
+does not deviate to much and that it would be possible to port programs
+with embedded sql written for other DBMS:s to Postgres95 and thus
+promoting the spirit of free software.
+
+
+@node Simple description of the concept, How to use it, Why embedded SQL, Top
+@comment node-name, next, previous, up
+@chapter Simple description of the concept
+
+You write your program in C with some special sql things.
+For declaring variables that can be used in SQL statements you need to
+put them in a special declare section.
+You use a special syntax for the sql queries.
+
+Before compiling you run the file through the embedded sql c
+preprocessor and it converts the SQL statements you used to function
+calls with the variables used as arguments. Both variables that are used
+as input to the SQL statements and variables that will contain the
+result are passed.
+
+Then you compile and at link time you link with a special library that
+contains the functions used. These functions (actually it is mostly one
+single function) fetches the information from the arguments, performs
+the SQL query using the ordinary interface (pq) and puts back
+the result in the arguments dedicated for output.
+
+Then you run your program and when the control arrives to the SQL
+statement the SQL statement is performed against the database and you
+can continue with the result.
+
+
+@node How to use it, How it works, Simple description of the concept, Top
+@comment node-name, next, previous, up
+@chapter How to use it
+
+This chapter describes how to use the ECPG tool.
+
+@menu
+* Preprocessor::
+* Library::
+* Error handling::
+@end menu
+
+@node Preprocessor, Library, How to use it, How to use it
+@comment node-name, next, previous, up
+@section Preprocessor
+
+@cindex preprocessor
+@cindex @code{ecpg}
+The preprocessor is called @code{ecpg}. After installation it resides in
+the postgres @code{bin} directory. It accepts two arguments like
+@code{iname=filename} and @code{oname=filename}. Both arguments must be
+present or an error will occur.
+
+In the alpha version the preprocessor has a lot of flaws:
+@table @asis
+@item Debug text output
+It writes every token parsed to the @code{stderr}.
+@item Looses line numbering
+The line numbers and file name information is lost in the preprocessor.
+This means that when running the program through a debugger you end up
+in the @code{.c}-file that is the output from the preprocessor and not
+in the input to the preprocessor. This can be fixed!
+@item The interface is strange, to say the least
+It would be better with a consistant unix arguments interface, perhaps
+builtin default filenames so they won't have to be given all the time.
+@item Cannot do syntax checking on your SQL statements
+Whatever you write is copied more or less exactly to the postgres95 and
+you will not be able to locate your errors until run-time.
+@end table
+
+@node Library, Error handling, Preprocessor, How to use it
+@section Library
+
+@cindex library functions
+@cindex @code{libecpg.a}
+@cindex @code{-lecpg}
+The library is called @code{libecpg.a}. The library used the pq library
+for the communication to the postgres server so you will have to link
+your program with @code{-lecpg -lpq}.
+
+The library has some methods that are "hidden" but that could prove very
+useful sometime.
+
+@table @asis
+@item @code{ECPGdebug(int)}
+@cindex @code{ECPGdebug(int)}
+@cindex debuglogging
+If this is called, with a non-zero argument, then debuglogging is turned
+on. Debuglogging is done on @code{stderr}. Most SQL statement logs its
+arguments and result.
+
+The most important one (@code{ECPGdo}) that is called on all SQL
+statements except @code{EXEC SQL COMMIT}, @code{EXEC SQL ROLLBACK},
+@code{EXEC SQL CONNECT} logs both its expanded string, i.e. the string
+with all the input variables inserted, and the result from the
+postgres95 server. This can be very useful when searching for errors
+in your SQL statements.
+
+@item @code{ECPGstatus()}
+@cindex @code{ECPGstatus()}
+This method returns TRUE if we are connected to a database and FALSE if
+not.
+@end table
+
+@node Error handling, , Library, How to use it
+@comment node-name, next, previous, up
+@section Error handling
+
+@cindex @code{sqlca.h}
+@cindex @code{struct sqlca}
+@cindex @code{sqlcode}
+@cindex @code{error messages}
+To be able to detect errors from the postgres server you include a line
+like:
+@example
+exec sql include sqlca;
+@end example
+in the include section of your file. This will define a struct and a
+variable with the name @code{sqlca} as following:
+@example
+struct sqlca @{
+ int sqlcode;
+ struct @{
+ int sqlerrml;
+ char sqlerrmc[1000];
+ @} sqlerrm;
+@} sqlca;
+@end example
+
+If an error occured in the last SQL statement then @code{sqlca.sqlcode}
+will be non-zero. If @code{sqlca.sqlcode} is less that 0 then this is
+some kind of serious error, like the database definition does not match
+the query given. If it is bigger than 0 then this is a normal error like
+the table did not contain the requested row.
+
+sqlca.sqlerrm.sqlerrmc will contain a string that describes the error.
+The string ends with @code{line 23.} where the line is the line number
+in the source file (actually the file generated by the preprocessor but
+I hope I can fix this to be the line number in the input file.)
+
+List of errors that can occur:
+@cindex error list
+@table @asis
+@item -1, Unsupported type %s on line %d.
+Does not normally occur. This is a sign that the preprocessor has
+generated something that the library does not know about. Perhaps you
+are running incompatible versions of the preprocessor and the library.
+
+@item -1, Too many arguments line %d.
+@itemx -1, Too few arguments line %d.
+The preprocessor has goofed up and generated some incorrect code.
+
+@item -1, Error starting transaction line %d.
+Postgres95 signalled to us that we cannot open the connection.
+
+@item -1, Postgres error: %s line %d.
+Some postgres95 error. The message contains the error message from the
+postgres95 backend.
+
+@item 1, Data not found line %d.
+This is a "normal" error that tells you that what you are quering cannot
+be found or we have gone through the cursor.
+
+@item -1, To many matches line %d.
+This means that the query has returned several lines. The @code{SELECT}
+you made probably was not unique.
+
+@item -1, Not correctly formatted int type: %s line %d.
+This means that the host variable is of an @code{int} type and the field
+in the postgres95 database is of another type and contains a value that
+cannot be interpreted as an @code{int}. The library uses @code{strtol}
+for this conversion.
+
+@item -1, Not correctly formatted unsigned type: %s line %d.
+This means that the host variable is of an @code{unsigned int} type and
+the field in the postgres95 database is of another type and contains a
+value that cannot be interpreted as an @code{unsigned int}. The library
+uses @code{strtoul} for this conversion.
+
+@item -1, Not correctly formatted floating point type: %s line %d.
+This means that the host variable is of an @code{float} type and
+the field in the postgres95 database is of another type and contains a
+value that cannot be interpreted as an @code{float}. The library
+uses @code{strtod} for this conversion.
+
+@item -1, Too few arguments line %d.
+This means that the postgres95 has returned more records than we have
+matching variables. Perhaps you have forgotten a couple of the host
+variables in the @code{INTO :var1,:var2}-list.
+
+@item -1, Too many arguments line %d.
+This means that th postgres95 has returned fewer records than we have
+host variables. Perhaps you have to many host variables in the
+@code{INTO :var1,:var2}-list.
+
+@item -1, Empty query line %d.
+Postgres95 returned PGRES_EMPTY_QUERY.
+
+@item -1, Error: %s line %d.
+Postgres95 returned PGRES_NONFATAL_ERROR, PGRES_FATAL_ERROR or
+PGRES_BAD_RESPONSE. Which one and why is hopefully explained in the
+message.
+
+@item -1, Postgres error line %d.
+Postgres95 returns something that the library does not know how to
+handle. This is probably because the version of postgres95 does not
+match the version of the ecpg library.
+
+@item -1, Error committing line %d.
+Error during @code{COMMIT}. @code{EXEC SQL COMMIT} is translated to an
+@code{end} operation in postgres95 and that is the operation that could
+not be performed.
+
+@item -1, Error rolling back line %d.
+Error during @code{ROLLBACK}. @code{EXEC SQL ROLLBACK} is translated to
+an @code{abort} operation in postgres95 and that is the operation that
+could not be performed.
+
+@item -1, ECPGconnect: could not open database %s.
+The connect to the database did not work.
+
+@end table
+
+@node How it works, Limitations, How to use it, Top
+@chapter How it works
+@comment node-name, next, previous, up
+
+This chapter describes how the things work. The ambition is to make this
+chapter contain things for those that want to have a look inside and the
+chapter on How to use it should be enough for all normal questions.
+
+So, read this before looking at the internals of the @code{ecpg}. If
+you are not interested in how it really works, skip this chapter.
+
+@menu
+* The preprocessor::
+* A complete example::
+* The library::
+@end menu
+
+@node The preprocessor, A complete example, How it works, How it works
+@comment node-name, next, previous, up
+@section The preprocessor
+
+First three lines are written to the output. A comment and two include
+lines necessary for the interface to the library.
+
+Then the preprocessor works in one pass only reading the input file and
+writing to the output as it goes along. Normally it just echoes
+everything to the output without looking at it further.
+
+When it comes to an @code{EXEC SQL} statements it interviens and
+changes them depending on what iit is. The @code{EXEC SQL} statement can
+be one of these:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item Declare sections
+@cindex Declare section
+Declare sections begins with
+@example
+exec sql begin declare section;
+@end example
+and ends with
+@example
+exec sql end declare section;
+@end example
+In the section only variable declarations are allowed. Every variable
+declare within this section is also entered in a list of variables
+indexed on their name together with the corresponding type.
+
+The declaration is echoed to the file to make the variable a normal
+C-variable also.
+
+The special types VARCHAR and VARCHAR2 are converted into a named struct
+for every variable. A declaration like:
+@example
+VARCHAR var[180];
+@end example
+is converted into
+@example
+struct varchar_var @{ int len; char arr[180]; @} var;
+@end example
+
+
+@item Include statements
+@cindex Include statement
+An include statement looks like:
+@example
+exec sql include filename;
+@end example
+It is converted into
+@example
+#include <filename.h>
+@end example
+
+@item Connect statement
+@cindex Connect statement
+A connect statements looks like:
+@example
+exec sql connect 'databasename';
+@end example
+That statement is converted into
+@example
+ECPGconnect("databasename");
+@end example
+
+@item Open cursor statement
+@cindex Open cursor statement
+An open cursor statement looks like:
+@example
+exec sql open blablabla;
+@end example
+and that is ignore and not copied from the output.
+
+@item Commit statement
+@cindex Commit statement
+A commit statement looks like
+@example
+exec sql commit;
+@end example
+and is translated on the output to
+@example
+ECPGcommit(__LINE__);
+@end example
+
+@item Rollback statement
+@cindex Rollback statement
+A rollback statement looks like
+@example
+exec sql rollback;
+@end example
+and is translated on the output to
+@example
+ECPGrollback(__LINE__);
+@end example
+
+@item Other statements
+Other SQL statements are other statements that start with
+@code{exec sql} and ends with @code{;}. Everything inbetween is treated
+as an sql statement and parsed for variable substitution.
+
+Variable substitution occur when a symbol starts with a colon
+(@code{:}). Then a variable with that name is found among the variables
+that were previously declared within a declare section and depending on
+whether or not the SQL statements knows it to be a variable for input or
+output the pointers to the variables are written to the output to allow
+for access by the function.
+
+For every variable that is part of the SQL request the function gets
+another five arguments.
+@enumerate
+@item The type as a special symbol
+@item A pointer to the value
+@item The size of the variable if it is a varchar
+@item Number of elements in the array (for array fetches)
+@item The offset to the next element in the array (for array fetches)
+@end enumerate
+Since the array fetches are not implemented yet the two last arguments
+are not really important. They could perhaps have been left out.
+
+@end itemize
+
+
+@node A complete example, The library, The preprocessor, How it works
+@comment node-name, next, previous, up
+@section A complete example
+Here is a complete example describing the output of the preprocessor:
+@example
+exec sql begin declare section;
+int index;
+int result;
+exec sql end declare section;
+...
+ exec sql select res into :result from mytable where index = :index;
+@end example
+is translated into:
+@example
+/* These two include files are added by the preprocessor */
+#include <ecpgtype.h>
+#include <ecpglib.h>
+/* exec sql begin declare section */
+
+ int index;
+ int result;
+/* exec sql end declare section */
+
+...
+ ECPGdo(__LINE__, "select res from mytable where index = ;;",
+ ECPGt_int,&index,0,0,sizeof(int),
+ ECPGt_EOIT,
+ ECPGt_int,&result,0,0,sizeof(int),
+ ECPGt_EORT );
+@end example
+(the indentation in this manual is added for readability and not
+something that the preprocessor can do.)
+
+
+@node The library, , A complete example, How it works
+@comment node-name, next, previous, up
+@section The library
+The most important function in the library is the @code{ECPGdo}
+function. It takes a variable amount of arguments. Hopefully we wont run
+into machines with limits on the amount of variables that can be
+accepted by a varchar function. This could easily add up to 50 or so
+arguments.
+
+The arguments are:
+@table @asis
+@item A line number
+This is a line number for the original line used in error messages only.
+@item A string
+This is the sql request that is to be issued. This request is modified
+by the input variables, i.e. the variables that where not known at
+compile time but are to be entered in the request. Where the variables
+should go the string contains @code{;;}.
+@item Input variables
+As described in the section about the preprocessor every input variable
+gets five arguments.
+@item ECPGt_EOIT
+An enum telling that there are no more input variables.
+@item Output variables
+As described in the section about the preprocessor every input variable
+gets five arguments. These variables are filled by the function.
+@item ECPGt_EORT
+An enum telling that there are no more variables.
+@end table
+
+All the SQL statements are performed in one transaction unless you issue
+a commit transaction. This works so that the first transaction or the
+first after a commit or rollback always begins a transaction.
+
+To be completed: entries describing the other entries.
+
+@node Limitations, Porting from other DBMSs, How it works, Top
+@chapter Limitations
+@comment node-name, next, previous, up
+
+I separate the limitations in two different groups. Those that are of
+the kind that I have not gotten around to it yet and those that I will
+never bother to look at.
+
+@menu
+* What can be done with this concept::
+* What will never be included and why::
+@end menu
+
+@node What can be done with this concept, What will never be included and why, Limitations, Limitations
+@comment node-name, next, previous, up
+@section What can be done with this concept
+
+This is a list of things that I have plans to include in some future.
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item no restriction to strings only
+The PQ interface, and most of all the PQexec function, that is used by
+the ecpg relies on that the request is built up as a string. In some
+cases, like when the data contains the null character, this will be a
+serious problem.
+
+@item line numbering
+The preprocessor should generate output with directions to the compiler
+to generate debugging code including the file name and line numbers of
+the input to the preprocessor.
+
+@item error codes
+There should be different error numbers for the different errors instead
+of just -1 for them all.
+
+@item library functions
+to_date et al.
+
+@item records
+@cindex records
+Possibility to define records or @code{struct}s in the declare section
+in a way that the record can be filled from one row in the database.
+
+This is a simpler way to handle an entire row at a time.
+
+@item array operations
+@cindex array operations
+Oracle has array operations that enhances speed. When implementing it in
+@code{ecpg} it is done for compatibility reasons only. For them to
+improve speed would require a lot more insight in the postgres internal
+mechanisms than I possess.
+
+@item indicator variables
+@cindex indicator variables
+@cindex @code{VARCHAR2}
+Oracle has indicator variables that tell if a value is @code{null} or if
+it is empty. This largely simplifies array operations and provides for a
+way to hack around some design flaws in the handling of @code{VARCHAR2}
+@footnote{like that an empty string isn't distinguishable from a
+@code{null} value}. I am not sure if this is an Oracle extension or part
+of the ANSI standard.
+
+@item typedefs
+@cindex typedef
+As well as complex types like records and arrays, typedefs would be
+a good thing to take care of.
+
+@item conversion of scripts
+@cindex conversion of scripts
+To set up a database you need a few scripts with table definitions and
+other configuration parameters. If you have these scripts for an old
+database you would like to just apply them to get a postgres database
+that works in the same way.
+
+The functionality could be accomplished with some conversion scripts.
+Speed will never be accomplished in this way. To do this you need a
+bigger insight in the database construction and the use of the database
+than could be realised in a script.
+
+@end table
+
+
+@node What will never be included and why, , What can be done with this concept, Limitations
+@comment node-name, next, previous, up
+@section What will never be included and why
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item oracles single tasking possibility
+@cindex single tasking
+Oracle version 7.0 on AIX 3 uses the OS-supported locks on the shared
+memory segments and allows the application designer to link an
+application in a so called single tasking way. Instead of starting one
+client process per application process both the database part and the
+application part is run in the same process. In later versions of oracle
+this is no longer supported.
+
+This would require a total redesign of the postgres access model and
+that effort can not justify the performance gained.
+
+@end table
+
+
+@node Porting from other DBMSs, Installation, Limitations, Top
+@chapter Porting from other DBMSs
+@comment node-name, next, previous, up
+
+To be written by persons that knows the different DBMSs and that
+actually does port something...
+
+@node Installation, Index, Porting from other DBMSs, Top
+@comment node-name, next, previous, up
+@chapter Installation
+@cindex installation
+
+Step by step installation (if everything goes ok):
+
+@enumerate
+@item Fetch everything and unpack
+
+If you are reading this documentation you have probably managed this
+step already.
+
+@item @code{./configure --with-postgres=/path/to/postgres}
+
+This is to be done in the ecpg directory, i.e. the directory containing
+the @file{configure} file.
+
+The @file{/path/to/postgres} is the path to the installed postgres. It
+points out the directory where the include, lib and bin directories
+reside. The include directory is used when building the library and all
+three of them become residents for ecpg include files, library and
+binaries.
+
+@item @code{make all}
+
+@item As the postgres user @code{make install}
+
+The postgres user is the owner of the postgres include, lib and bin
+directories. The installation procedure installs its files there
+alongside the postgres files.
+@item Done.
+
+@end enumerate
+
+
+@node Index, , Installation, Top
+@unnumbered Index
+
+@printindex cp
+
+@contents
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/doc/texinfo.tex b/src/interfaces/ecpg/doc/texinfo.tex
new file mode 100755
index 00000000000..34533b51226
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/doc/texinfo.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,4053 @@
+%% TeX macros to handle texinfo files
+
+% Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+%This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
+%published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
+%your option) any later version.
+
+%This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
+%useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
+%of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+%General Public License for more details.
+
+%You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+%along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write
+%to the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139,
+%USA.
+
+
+%In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
+%You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
+%what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding!
+
+\def\texinfoversion{2.116}
+\message{Loading texinfo package [Version \texinfoversion]:}
+
+% Print the version number if in a .fmt file.
+\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}\message{}}
+
+% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
+
+\let\ptexlbrace=\{
+\let\ptexrbrace=\}
+\let\ptexdots=\dots
+\let\ptexdot=\.
+\let\ptexstar=\*
+\let\ptexend=\end
+\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
+\let\ptexb=\b
+\let\ptexc=\c
+\let\ptexi=\i
+\let\ptext=\t
+\let\ptexl=\l
+\let\ptexL=\L
+
+\def\tie{\penalty 10000\ } % Save plain tex definition of ~.
+
+\message{Basics,}
+\chardef\other=12
+
+% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
+% starts a new line in the output.
+\newlinechar = `^^J
+
+% Ignore a token.
+%
+\def\gobble#1{}
+
+\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
+\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
+\hyphenation{eshell}
+
+% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
+\newdimen \bindingoffset \bindingoffset=0pt
+\newdimen \normaloffset \normaloffset=\hoffset
+\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
+\pagewidth=\hsize \pageheight=\vsize
+
+% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
+% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
+% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
+%
+\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
+\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
+ \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
+ \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
+ \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
+}%
+
+%---------------------Begin change-----------------------
+%
+%%%% For @cropmarks command.
+% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
+%
+\newdimen\cornerlong \newdimen\cornerthick
+\newdimen \topandbottommargin
+\newdimen \outerhsize \newdimen \outervsize
+\cornerlong=1pc\cornerthick=.3pt % These set size of cropmarks
+\outerhsize=7in
+%\outervsize=9.5in
+% Alternative @smallbook page size is 9.25in
+\outervsize=9.25in
+\topandbottommargin=.75in
+%
+%---------------------End change-----------------------
+
+% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
+% does insertions itself, but you have to call it yourself.
+\chardef\PAGE=255 \output={\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
+\def\onepageout#1{\hoffset=\normaloffset
+\ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
+\else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
+{\escapechar=`\\\relax % makes sure backslash is used in output files.
+\shipout\vbox{{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline} \pagebody{#1}%
+{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}}}%
+\advancepageno \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi}
+
+%%%% For @cropmarks command %%%%
+
+% Here is a modification of the main output routine for Near East Publications
+% This provides right-angle cropmarks at all four corners.
+% The contents of the page are centerlined into the cropmarks,
+% and any desired binding offset is added as an \hskip on either
+% site of the centerlined box. (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
+%
+\def\croppageout#1{\hoffset=0pt % make sure this doesn't mess things up
+{\escapechar=`\\\relax % makes sure backslash is used in output files.
+ \shipout
+ \vbox to \outervsize{\hsize=\outerhsize
+ \vbox{\line{\ewtop\hfill\ewtop}}
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \line{\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}
+ \hfill
+ \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}}
+ \vskip \topandbottommargin
+ \centerline{\ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
+ \vbox{
+ {\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}
+ \pagebody{#1}
+ {\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}}
+ \ifodd\pageno\else\hskip\bindingoffset\fi}
+ \vskip \topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
+ \boxmaxdepth\cornerthick
+ \line{\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}
+ \hfill
+ \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}}
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \vbox{\line{\ewbot\hfill\ewbot}}
+ }}
+ \advancepageno
+ \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi}
+%
+% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks
+\def\cropmarks{\let\onepageout=\croppageout }
+
+\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
+{\catcode`\@ =11
+\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
+\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
+\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
+\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
+}
+
+%
+% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
+% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
+% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
+%
+\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
+\def\nstop{\vbox
+ {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
+\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
+\def\nsbot{\vbox
+ {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
+
+% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
+% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
+% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
+%
+\def\parsearg#1{%
+ \let\next = #1%
+ \begingroup
+ \obeylines
+ \futurelet\temp\parseargx
+}
+
+% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
+% the like), remove it and recurse. Otherwise, we're done.
+\def\parseargx{%
+ % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
+ \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
+ \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
+ \else
+ \expandafter\parseargline
+ \fi
+}
+
+% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
+{\obeyspaces %
+ \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
+
+{\obeylines %
+ \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
+ \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
+ %
+ % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
+ % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
+ \argremovec #1\c\relax %
+ \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
+ %
+ % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
+ \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
+ }%
+}
+
+% Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
+% do that for us. The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
+% in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
+% just to delimit the argument to the \c.
+\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+
+% \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
+% @end itemize @c foo
+% will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
+% `itemize'. Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
+% result to \toks0.
+%
+% This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
+% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
+% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands. (If it ever
+% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
+% here.) But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
+% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
+% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
+%
+\def\removeactivespaces#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \ignoreactivespaces
+ \edef\temp{#1}%
+ \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+% Change the active space to expand to nothing.
+%
+\begingroup
+ \obeyspaces
+ \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
+\endgroup
+
+
+\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
+
+%% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
+%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
+\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
+\def\ENVcheck{%
+\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment. Type Return to continue.}
+\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
+
+% @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now.
+\newhelp\EMsimple{Type <Return> to continue.}
+
+\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
+
+\def\beginxxx #1{%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
+{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
+\csname #1\endcsname\fi}
+
+% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
+%
+\def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
+\def\endxxx #1{%
+ \removeactivespaces{#1}%
+ \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
+ %
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
+ % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple
+ \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
+ \else
+ \unmatchedenderror\endthing
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
+ \csname E\endthing\endcsname
+ \fi
+}
+
+% There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started. Give an error.
+%
+\def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple
+ \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
+}
+
+% Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
+%
+\def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
+ \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
+}
+
+
+% Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
+% \nonfillstart and \quotations).
+\newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = \baselineskip
+\def\singlespace{%
+% Why was this kern here? It messes up equalizing space above and below
+% environments. --karl, 6may93
+%{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
+%\kern \baselineskip}%
+\baselineskip=\singlespaceskip
+}
+
+%% Simple single-character @ commands
+
+% @@ prints an @
+% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
+\def\@{{\tt \char '100}}
+
+% This is turned off because it was never documented
+% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
+%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
+%% but suppressing ligatures.
+%\def\`{{`}}
+%\def\'{{'}}
+
+% Used to generate quoted braces.
+
+\def\mylbrace {{\tt \char '173}}
+\def\myrbrace {{\tt \char '175}}
+\let\{=\mylbrace
+\let\}=\myrbrace
+
+% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
+\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @* forces a line break.
+\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
+
+% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
+\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
+% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
+% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
+\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
+
+% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
+% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
+% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
+% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
+% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
+% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
+% the text is small, which looks bad.
+%
+\def\group{\begingroup
+ \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
+ \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
+ \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
+ % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
+ % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it. (See p.82 of
+ % the TeXbook.) Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
+ % above. But it's pretty close.
+ \def\Egroup{%
+ \egroup % End the \vtop.
+ \endgroup % End the \group.
+ }%
+ %
+ \vtop\bgroup
+ % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
+ % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
+ % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
+ % and the first line afterwards is too small. But we can't put the
+ % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
+ % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
+ \everypar = {\strut}%
+ %
+ % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
+ % normal interline spacing.
+ \offinterlineskip
+ %
+ % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
+ % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
+ % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
+ % turned off the interline space. Simplest is to make them be an
+ % empty paragraph.
+ \ifx\par\lisppar
+ \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
+ %
+ % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
+ \obeylines
+ \fi
+ %
+ % We do @comment here in case we are called inside an environment,
+ % such as @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
+ % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
+ % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
+ % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
+ % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
+ \comment
+}
+%
+% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
+% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
+%
+\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
+group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
+where each line of input produces a line of output.}
+
+% @need space-in-mils
+% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
+
+\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
+
+\def\need{\parsearg\needx}
+
+% Old definition--didn't work.
+%\def\needx #1{\par %
+%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
+%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
+%{\baselineskip=0pt%
+%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\penalty 10000
+%\prevdepth=-1000pt
+%}}
+
+\def\needx#1{%
+ % Go into vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
+ % paragraph.
+ \par
+ %
+ % Don't add any leading before our big empty box, but allow a page
+ % break, since the best break might be right here.
+ \allowbreak
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}%
+ %
+ % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
+ % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
+ % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
+ % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
+ % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
+ %
+ % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
+ % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
+ % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
+ % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
+ % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
+ % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
+ % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
+ \penalty9999
+ %
+ % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
+ \kern -#1\mil
+ %
+ % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
+ \nobreak
+}
+
+% @br forces paragraph break
+
+\let\br = \par
+
+% @dots{} output some dots
+
+\def\dots{$\ldots$}
+
+% @page forces the start of a new page
+
+\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
+
+% @exdent text....
+% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
+
+% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
+% That's how much \exdent should take out.
+\newskip\exdentamount
+
+% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
+\def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
+\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
+
+% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
+\def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
+\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
+\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
+
+%\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
+
+% @include file insert text of that file as input.
+
+\def\include{\parsearg\includezzz}
+%Use \input\thisfile to avoid blank after \input, which may be an active
+%char (in which case the blank would become the \input argument).
+%The grouping keeps the value of \thisfile correct even when @include
+%is nested.
+\def\includezzz #1{\begingroup
+\def\thisfile{#1}\input\thisfile
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\thisfile{}
+
+% @center line outputs that line, centered
+
+\def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
+\def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
+\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+\centerline{#1}}}
+
+% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
+
+\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
+\def\spxxx #1{\par \vskip #1\baselineskip}
+
+% @comment ...line which is ignored...
+% @c is the same as @comment
+% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
+
+\def\comment{\catcode 64=\other \catcode 123=\other \catcode 125=\other%
+\parsearg \commentxxx}
+
+\def\commentxxx #1{\catcode 64=0 \catcode 123=1 \catcode 125=2 }
+
+\let\c=\comment
+
+% Prevent errors for section commands.
+% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
+\def\ignoresections{%
+\let\chapter=\relax
+\let\unnumbered=\relax
+\let\top=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsec=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsection=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
+\let\section=\relax
+\let\subsec=\relax
+\let\subsubsec=\relax
+\let\subsection=\relax
+\let\subsubsection=\relax
+\let\appendix=\relax
+\let\appendixsec=\relax
+\let\appendixsection=\relax
+\let\appendixsubsec=\relax
+\let\appendixsubsection=\relax
+\let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
+\let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
+\let\contents=\relax
+\let\smallbook=\relax
+\let\titlepage=\relax
+}
+
+% Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
+% and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
+% incorrectly.
+%
+\def\ignoremorecommands{%
+ \let\defcv = \relax
+ \let\deffn = \relax
+ \let\deffnx = \relax
+ \let\defindex = \relax
+ \let\defivar = \relax
+ \let\defmac = \relax
+ \let\defmethod = \relax
+ \let\defop = \relax
+ \let\defopt = \relax
+ \let\defspec = \relax
+ \let\deftp = \relax
+ \let\deftypefn = \relax
+ \let\deftypefun = \relax
+ \let\deftypevar = \relax
+ \let\deftypevr = \relax
+ \let\defun = \relax
+ \let\defvar = \relax
+ \let\defvr = \relax
+ \let\ref = \relax
+ \let\xref = \relax
+ \let\printindex = \relax
+ \let\pxref = \relax
+ \let\settitle = \relax
+ \let\include = \relax
+ \let\lowersections = \relax
+ \let\down = \relax
+ \let\raisesections = \relax
+ \let\up = \relax
+ \let\set = \relax
+ \let\clear = \relax
+}
+
+% Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore.
+%
+\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
+
+% Also ignore @ifinfo, @menu, and @direntry text.
+%
+\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
+\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
+\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
+
+% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
+%
+\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
+ % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
+ \ignoresections
+ %
+ % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
+ \long\def\doignoretext##1\end #1{\enddoignore}%
+ %
+ % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
+ \catcode32 = 10
+ %
+ % And now expand that command.
+ \doignoretext
+}
+
+% What we do to finish off ignored text.
+%
+\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
+
+\newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
+\def\obstexwarn{%
+ \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
+ % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
+ % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
+ \immediate\write16{}
+ \immediate\write16{***WARNING*** for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
+ \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
+ \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
+ \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
+ \immediate\write16{ Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
+ \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
+ \immediate\write16{ script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
+ \immediate\write16{ to use a workaround.}
+ \immediate\write16{}
+ \warnedobstrue
+ \fi
+}
+
+% **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex. For a
+% workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
+% uncomment the following line:
+%%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
+
+% Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
+% purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
+%
+\def\nestedignore#1{%
+ \obstexwarn
+ % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
+ % command, so that nested ignore constructs work. Thus, we put the
+ % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result. To minimize
+ % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
+ % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
+ %
+ \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
+ % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
+ \ignoresections
+ %
+ % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
+ % @end command again.
+ \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
+ %
+ % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands. Most cause no
+ % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
+ % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
+ % undefine them.
+ %
+ % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
+ % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
+ \ignoremorecommands
+ %
+ % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
+ % all the font commands to also use \nullfont. We don't use
+ % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
+ % might have that installed. Therefore, math mode will still
+ % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
+ % stuff compared to the main input.
+ %
+ \nullfont
+ \let\tenrm = \nullfont \let\tenit = \nullfont \let\tensl = \nullfont
+ \let\tenbf = \nullfont \let\tentt = \nullfont \let\smallcaps = \nullfont
+ \let\tensf = \nullfont
+ % Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in
+ % smallexample)
+ \let\indrm = \nullfont \let\indit = \nullfont \let\indsl = \nullfont
+ \let\indbf = \nullfont \let\indtt = \nullfont \let\indsc = \nullfont
+ \let\indsf = \nullfont
+ %
+ % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
+ \tracinglostchars = 0
+ %
+ % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
+ \frenchspacing
+ %
+ % Don't report underfull hboxes.
+ \hbadness = 10000
+ %
+ % Do minimal line-breaking.
+ \pretolerance = 10000
+ %
+ % Do not execute instructions in @tex
+ \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}
+}
+
+% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
+% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
+%
+% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
+% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
+% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
+% didn't need it.
+%
+\def\set{\parsearg\setxxx}
+\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
+\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
+ \def\temp{#2}%
+ \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
+ \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
+ \fi
+}
+\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\xdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
+
+% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
+%
+\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
+\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
+
+% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
+%
+\def\value#1{\expandafter
+ \ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+ {\{No value for ``#1''\}}
+ \else \csname SET#1\endcsname \fi}
+
+% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
+% with @set.
+%
+\def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
+\def\ifsetxxx #1{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+ \expandafter\ifsetfail
+ \else
+ \expandafter\ifsetsucceed
+ \fi
+}
+\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
+\def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifset}
+
+% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
+% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
+%
+\def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
+\def\ifclearxxx #1{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+ \expandafter\ifclearsucceed
+ \else
+ \expandafter\ifclearfail
+ \fi
+}
+\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
+\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
+
+% @iftex always succeeds; we read the text following, through @end
+% iftex). But `@end iftex' should be valid only after an @iftex.
+%
+\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
+\defineunmatchedend{iftex}
+
+% We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it
+% at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
+% effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group). So we must
+% define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value. (We can't
+% just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
+% the @ifset might be nested.)
+%
+\def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
+ \edef\temp{%
+ % Remember the current value of \E#1.
+ \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
+ %
+ % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
+ \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
+ }%
+ \temp
+}
+
+% We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
+% control sequences after we've constructed them.
+%
+\def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
+
+% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
+%
+\def\asis#1{#1}
+
+% @math means output in math mode.
+% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control
+% sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written. Then,
+% we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they
+% should be, according to the definition of Texinfo). So we must use a
+% control sequence to switch into and out of math mode.
+%
+% This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it
+% seems unlikely it will ever be needed there.
+%
+\let\implicitmath = $
+\def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath}
+
+% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
+\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
+\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
+
+\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
+\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
+\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
+\let\nwnode=\node
+\let\lastnode=\relax
+
+\def\donoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}\fi
+\let\lastnode=\relax}
+
+\def\unnumbnoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\unnumbsetref{\lastnode}\fi
+\let\lastnode=\relax}
+
+\def\appendixnoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\appendixsetref{\lastnode}\fi
+\let\lastnode=\relax}
+
+\let\refill=\relax
+
+% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
+% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
+% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
+\def\setfilename{%
+ \readauxfile
+ \opencontents
+ \openindices
+ \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
+ \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
+ \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
+}
+
+\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
+
+\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
+\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{See Info file \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
+ node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
+
+\message{fonts,}
+
+% Font-change commands.
+
+% Texinfo supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
+% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
+\newfam\sffam
+\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
+\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
+
+%% Try out Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf
+\let\mainmagstep=\magstephalf
+
+\ifx\bigger\relax
+\let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
+\font\textrm=cmr12
+\font\texttt=cmtt12
+\else
+\font\textrm=cmr10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\texttt=cmtt10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\fi
+% Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
+% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
+% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
+\font\textbf=cmb10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\textit=cmti10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\textsl=cmsl10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\textsf=cmss10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\textsc=cmcsc10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
+
+% A few fonts for @defun, etc.
+\font\defbf=cmbx10 scaled \magstep1 %was 1314
+\font\deftt=cmtt10 scaled \magstep1
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
+
+% Fonts for indices and small examples.
+% We actually use the slanted font rather than the italic,
+% because texinfo normally uses the slanted fonts for that.
+% Do not make many font distinctions in general in the index, since they
+% aren't very useful.
+\font\ninett=cmtt9
+\font\indrm=cmr9
+\font\indit=cmsl9
+\let\indsl=\indit
+\let\indtt=\ninett
+\let\indsf=\indrm
+\let\indbf=\indrm
+\let\indsc=\indrm
+\font\indi=cmmi9
+\font\indsy=cmsy9
+
+% Fonts for headings
+\font\chaprm=cmbx12 scaled \magstep2
+\font\chapit=cmti12 scaled \magstep2
+\font\chapsl=cmsl12 scaled \magstep2
+\font\chaptt=cmtt12 scaled \magstep2
+\font\chapsf=cmss12 scaled \magstep2
+\let\chapbf=\chaprm
+\font\chapsc=cmcsc10 scaled\magstep3
+\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
+\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
+
+\font\secrm=cmbx12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\secit=cmti12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\secsl=cmsl12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\sectt=cmtt12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\secsf=cmss12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\secbf=cmbx12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\secsc=cmcsc10 scaled\magstep2
+\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+
+% \font\ssecrm=cmbx10 scaled \magstep1 % This size an font looked bad.
+% \font\ssecit=cmti10 scaled \magstep1 % The letters were too crowded.
+% \font\ssecsl=cmsl10 scaled \magstep1
+% \font\ssectt=cmtt10 scaled \magstep1
+% \font\ssecsf=cmss10 scaled \magstep1
+
+%\font\ssecrm=cmb10 scaled 1315 % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx.
+%\font\ssecit=cmti10 scaled 1315 % Also, the size is a little larger than
+%\font\ssecsl=cmsl10 scaled 1315 % being scaled magstep1.
+%\font\ssectt=cmtt10 scaled 1315
+%\font\ssecsf=cmss10 scaled 1315
+
+%\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm
+
+\font\ssecrm=cmbx12 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\ssecit=cmti12 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\ssecsl=cmsl12 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\ssectt=cmtt12 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\ssecsf=cmss12 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\ssecbf=cmbx12 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\ssecsc=cmcsc10 scaled \magstep1
+\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
+% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
+% but that is not a standard magnification.
+
+% Fonts for title page:
+\font\titlerm = cmbx12 scaled \magstep3
+\let\authorrm = \secrm
+
+% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
+% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
+% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we
+% don't bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont (which would
+% also require loading a lot more fonts).
+%
+\def\resetmathfonts{%
+ \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy
+ \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf
+ \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf
+}
+
+
+% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
+% of just \STYLE. We do this so that font changes will continue to work
+% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
+% cases, not the current. Plain TeX does, for example,
+% \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \tenbf} By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need
+% to redefine \bf itself.
+\def\textfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
+ \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
+ \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
+ \resetmathfonts}
+\def\chapfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
+ \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
+ \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
+ \resetmathfonts}
+\def\secfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
+ \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
+ \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
+ \resetmathfonts}
+\def\subsecfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
+ \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
+ \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
+ \resetmathfonts}
+\def\indexfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\indrm \let\tenit=\indit \let\tensl=\indsl
+ \let\tenbf=\indbf \let\tentt=\indtt \let\smallcaps=\indsc
+ \let\tensf=\indsf \let\teni=\indi \let\tensy=\indsy
+ \resetmathfonts}
+
+% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
+%
+\textfonts
+
+% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
+\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
+
+% Fonts for short table of contents.
+\font\shortcontrm=cmr12
+\font\shortcontbf=cmbx12
+\font\shortcontsl=cmsl12
+
+%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
+%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
+
+% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
+% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
+\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
+\def\smartitalic#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+\let\i=\smartitalic
+\let\var=\smartitalic
+\let\dfn=\smartitalic
+\let\emph=\smartitalic
+\let\cite=\smartitalic
+
+\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
+\let\strong=\b
+
+% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
+% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
+% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
+%
+\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
+\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
+
+\def\t#1{%
+ {\tt \nohyphenation \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
+ \null
+}
+\let\ttfont = \t
+%\def\samp #1{`{\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}'\null}
+\def\samp #1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
+\def\key #1{{\tt \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
+\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
+
+\let\file=\samp
+
+% @code is a modification of @t,
+% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
+\def\tclose#1{%
+ {%
+ % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
+ \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
+ %
+ % Switch to typewriter.
+ \tt
+ %
+ % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
+ \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
+ %
+ % Turn off hyphenation.
+ \nohyphenation
+ %
+ \rawbackslash
+ \frenchspacing
+ #1%
+ }%
+ \null
+}
+
+% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
+% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overful hboxes
+% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
+
+% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
+% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
+% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
+% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate an a dash.
+% -- rms.
+{
+\catcode`\-=\active
+\catcode`\_=\active
+\global\def\code{\begingroup \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder \codex}
+% The following is used by \doprintindex to insure that long function names
+% wrap around. It is necessary for - and _ to be active before the index is
+% read from the file, as \entry parses the arguments long before \code is
+% ever called. -- mycroft
+\global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash \catcode`\_=\active \let_\realunder}
+}
+\def\realdash{-}
+\def\realunder{_}
+\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
+\def\codeunder{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}}
+\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
+
+%\let\exp=\tclose %Was temporary
+
+% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
+% then @kbd has no effect.
+
+\def\xkey{\key}
+\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
+\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
+\else\tclose{\look}\fi
+\else\tclose{\look}\fi}
+
+% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
+% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of
+% @dmn{}pt.
+%
+\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
+
+\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
+
+\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} %
+
+\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
+% Use of \lowercase was suggested.
+\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
+\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
+
+\message{page headings,}
+
+\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
+\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
+
+% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
+\def\titlefont#1{{\titlerm #1}}
+
+\newif\ifseenauthor
+\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
+
+\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
+\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
+ \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
+
+\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
+ \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
+% I deinstalled the following change because \cmr12 is undefined.
+% This change was not in the ChangeLog anyway. --rms.
+% \let\subtitlerm=\cmr12
+ \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
+ %
+ \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
+ %
+ % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
+ \vglue\titlepagetopglue
+ %
+ % Now you can print the title using @title.
+ \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
+ \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefont{##1}}
+ % print a rule at the page bottom also.
+ \finishedtitlepagefalse
+ \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
+ % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
+ \finishedtitlepagetrue
+ %
+ % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
+ \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
+ \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
+ %
+ % @author should come last, but may come many times.
+ \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
+ \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
+ {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
+ %
+ % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
+ % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
+ \let\oldpage = \page
+ \def\page{%
+ \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+ \finishtitlepage
+ \fi
+ \oldpage
+ \let\page = \oldpage
+ \hbox{}}%
+% \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
+}
+
+\def\Etitlepage{%
+ \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+ \finishtitlepage
+ \fi
+ % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
+ % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
+ % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
+ % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
+ \oldpage
+ \endgroup
+ \HEADINGSon
+}
+
+\def\finishtitlepage{%
+ \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
+ \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
+ \finishedtitlepagetrue
+}
+
+%%% Set up page headings and footings.
+
+\let\thispage=\folio
+
+\newtoks \evenheadline % Token sequence for heading line of even pages
+\newtoks \oddheadline % Token sequence for heading line of odd pages
+\newtoks \evenfootline % Token sequence for footing line of even pages
+\newtoks \oddfootline % Token sequence for footing line of odd pages
+
+% Now make Tex use those variables
+\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
+ \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
+\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
+ \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
+\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
+
+% Commands to set those variables.
+% For example, this is what @headings on does
+% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
+% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
+% @evenfooting @thisfile||
+% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
+
+\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
+\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
+\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
+
+\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
+\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
+\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
+
+{\catcode`\@=0 %
+
+\gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\everyheadingxxx #1{\everyheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\everyheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}
+\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\oddfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\everyfootingxxx #1{\everyfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\everyfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}
+\global\oddfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+%
+}% unbind the catcode of @.
+
+% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
+% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
+% @headings off turns them off.
+% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
+% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
+% By default, they are off.
+
+\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\HEADINGSoff{
+\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
+\HEADINGSoff
+% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
+% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
+% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
+% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
+% edge of all pages.
+\def\HEADINGSdouble{
+%\pagealignmacro
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+}
+% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
+% page number on top right.
+\def\HEADINGSsingle{
+%\pagealignmacro
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+}
+\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
+
+\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
+\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
+\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+}
+
+\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
+\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+}
+
+% Subroutines used in generating headings
+% Produces Day Month Year style of output.
+\def\today{\number\day\space
+\ifcase\month\or
+January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+\space\number\year}
+
+% Use this if you want the Month Day, Year style of output.
+%\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
+%January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+%July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+%\space\number\day, \number\year}
+
+% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings
+% It generates no output of its own
+
+\def\thistitle{No Title}
+\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
+\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
+
+\message{tables,}
+
+% @tabs -- simple alignment
+
+% These don't work. For one thing, \+ is defined as outer.
+% So these macros cannot even be defined.
+
+%\def\tabs{\parsearg\tabszzz}
+%\def\tabszzz #1{\settabs\+#1\cr}
+%\def\tabline{\parsearg\tablinezzz}
+%\def\tablinezzz #1{\+#1\cr}
+%\def\&{&}
+
+% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
+
+% default indentation of table text
+\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
+% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
+\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
+% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
+\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
+
+% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
+\newdimen\itemmax
+
+% Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
+% these defs.
+% They also define \itemindex
+% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
+
+\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
+
+\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
+
+\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
+\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
+
+\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
+\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
+
+\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
+\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
+
+\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
+ \itemzzz {#1}}
+
+\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
+ \itemzzz {#1}}
+
+\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
+ \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+ \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
+ \itemindex{#1}%
+ \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
+ %
+ % Be sure we are not still in the middle of a paragraph.
+ %{\parskip = 0in
+ %\par
+ %}%
+ %
+ % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
+ % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
+ % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
+ % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
+ % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
+ \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
+ %
+ % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
+ % but leave it ragged-right.
+ \begingroup
+ \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
+ \advance\hsize by\tableindent
+ \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
+ \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
+ \endgroup
+ %
+ % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
+ % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
+ \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
+ %
+ % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. Unfortunately
+ % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
+ % \baselineskip glue.
+ \nobreak
+ \endgroup
+ \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
+ \else
+ % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
+ % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. Since that
+ % text will be indented by \tableindent, we make the item text be in
+ % a zero-width box.
+ \noindent
+ \rlap{\hskip -\tableindent\box0}\ignorespaces%
+ \endgroup%
+ \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue%
+ \fi
+}
+
+\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
+\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
+\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
+\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
+\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
+\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
+
+%% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work
+\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
+
+\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\dontindex#1 \endtabley}}
+
+\def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\fnitemindex#1 \endtabley
+\def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\Etable=\relax}}
+
+\def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\vritemindex#1 \endtabley
+\def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\Etable=\relax}}
+
+\def\dontindex #1{}
+\def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
+\def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
+
+{\obeyspaces %
+\gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
+\tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
+
+\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+\aboveenvbreak %
+\begingroup %
+\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Neccessary kludge.
+\let\itemindex=#1%
+\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
+\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
+\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
+\def\itemfont{#2}%
+\itemmax=\tableindent %
+\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
+\advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
+\exdentamount=\tableindent
+\parindent = 0pt
+\parskip = \smallskipamount
+\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
+\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\item = \internalBitem %
+\let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
+\let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
+\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
+\let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
+\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
+}
+
+% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
+
+\newcount \itemno
+
+\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
+
+\def\itemizezzz #1{%
+ \begingroup % ended by the @end itemsize
+ \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
+}
+
+\def\itemizey #1#2{%
+\aboveenvbreak %
+\itemmax=\itemindent %
+\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
+\advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
+\exdentamount=\itemindent
+\parindent = 0pt %
+\parskip = \smallskipamount %
+\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
+\def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\def\itemcontents{#1}%
+\let\item=\itemizeitem}
+
+% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
+% These are `.?!:;,'
+\def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
+ \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
+
+% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
+% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
+%
+\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
+
+% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
+% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
+% argument is the same as `1'.
+%
+\def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
+\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
+\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
+ \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
+ %
+ % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
+ \def\thearg{#1}%
+ \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
+ %
+ % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
+ % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
+ % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
+ % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
+ % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
+ \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
+ \ifx\rest\empty
+ % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
+ % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
+ % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
+ % not equal to itself.
+ % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
+ %
+ % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
+ % continuing to look for a <number>.
+ %
+ \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
+ \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
+ \else
+ % It's a letter.
+ \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
+ \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
+ \else
+ \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
+ \numericenumerate
+ \fi
+}
+
+% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
+% given in \thearg.
+%
+\def\numericenumerate{%
+ \itemno = \thearg
+ \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
+}
+
+% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
+ \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+ \startenumeration{%
+ % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+ \ifnum\itemno=0
+ \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+ alphabet}%
+ \fi
+ \char\lccode\itemno
+ }%
+}
+
+% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
+ \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+ \startenumeration{%
+ % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+ \ifnum\itemno=0
+ \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+ alphabet}
+ \fi
+ \char\uccode\itemno
+ }%
+}
+
+% Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
+% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
+% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
+%
+\def\startenumeration#1{%
+ \advance\itemno by -1
+ \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
+}
+
+% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
+% to @enumerate.
+%
+\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
+\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
+\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+
+% Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
+
+\def\itemizeitem{%
+\advance\itemno by 1
+{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
+\ifhmode \errmessage{\in hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
+{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
+\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
+\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
+\flushcr}
+
+\message{indexing,}
+% Index generation facilities
+
+% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
+% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
+
+% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
+% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
+% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
+% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
+% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
+% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
+% for the sake of vms.
+
+\def\newindex #1{
+\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname% Define number for output file
+\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
+\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex
+\noexpand\doindex {#1}}
+}
+
+% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
+
+\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
+
+% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
+
+\def\newcodeindex #1{
+\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname% Define number for output file
+\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
+\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex
+\noexpand\docodeindex {#1}}
+}
+
+\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
+
+% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
+% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
+\def\synindex #1 #2 {%
+\expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
+\expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
+\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex
+\noexpand\doindex {#2}}%
+}
+
+% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
+% inside @code.
+\def\syncodeindex #1 #2 {%
+\expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
+\expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
+\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex
+\noexpand\docodeindex {#2}}%
+}
+
+% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
+% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
+% and it is "foo", the name of the index.
+
+% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
+% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
+
+% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
+% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
+
+\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
+\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
+
+% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
+\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
+\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
+
+\def\indexdummies{%
+\def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
+\def\w{\realbackslash w }%
+\def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
+\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
+\def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
+\def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
+\def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
+\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
+\def\less{\realbackslash less}%
+\def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
+\def\char{\realbackslash char}%
+\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
+\def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
+\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright }%
+\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
+\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
+\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
+\def\t##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
+\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
+\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
+\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
+\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
+\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
+\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
+\def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
+\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
+\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
+\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
+}
+
+% \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
+% This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
+\def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
+\def\indexdummytex{TeX}
+\def\indexdummydots{...}
+
+\def\indexnofonts{%
+\let\w=\indexdummyfont
+\let\t=\indexdummyfont
+\let\r=\indexdummyfont
+\let\i=\indexdummyfont
+\let\b=\indexdummyfont
+\let\emph=\indexdummyfont
+\let\strong=\indexdummyfont
+\let\cite=\indexdummyfont
+\let\sc=\indexdummyfont
+%Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
+% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |...
+%\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
+\let\tclose=\indexdummyfont
+\let\code=\indexdummyfont
+\let\file=\indexdummyfont
+\let\samp=\indexdummyfont
+\let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
+\let\key=\indexdummyfont
+\let\var=\indexdummyfont
+\let\TeX=\indexdummytex
+\let\dots=\indexdummydots
+}
+
+% To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
+% We must first make another character (@) an escape
+% so we do not become unable to do a definition.
+
+{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
+@gdef@realbackslash{\}}
+
+\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
+
+\def\doind #1#2{%
+{\count10=\lastpenalty %
+{\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
+\escapechar=`\\%
+{\let\folio=0% Expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio
+\def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
+% so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash in the indx.
+%
+% Now process the index-string once, with all font commands turned off,
+% to get the string to sort the index by.
+{\indexnofonts
+\xdef\temp1{#2}%
+}%
+% Now produce the complete index entry. We process the index-string again,
+% this time with font commands expanded, to get what to print in the index.
+\edef\temp{%
+\write \csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
+\realbackslash entry {\temp1}{\folio}{#2}}}%
+\temp }%
+}\penalty\count10}}
+
+\def\dosubind #1#2#3{%
+{\count10=\lastpenalty %
+{\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
+\escapechar=`\\%
+{\let\folio=0%
+\def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}%
+%
+% Now process the index-string once, with all font commands turned off,
+% to get the string to sort the index by.
+{\indexnofonts
+\xdef\temp1{#2 #3}%
+}%
+% Now produce the complete index entry. We process the index-string again,
+% this time with font commands expanded, to get what to print in the index.
+\edef\temp{%
+\write \csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
+\realbackslash entry {\temp1}{\folio}{#2}{#3}}}%
+\temp }%
+}\penalty\count10}}
+
+% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
+% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
+% or
+% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
+% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
+% containing these kinds of lines:
+% \initial {c}
+% before the first topic whose initial is c
+% \entry {topic}{pagelist}
+% for a topic that is used without subtopics
+% \primary {topic}
+% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
+% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
+% for each subtopic.
+
+% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
+% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
+
+\def\findex {\fnindex}
+\def\kindex {\kyindex}
+\def\cindex {\cpindex}
+\def\vindex {\vrindex}
+\def\tindex {\tpindex}
+\def\pindex {\pgindex}
+
+\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
+{\obeylines %
+\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
+\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
+
+% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
+
+% This is what you call to cause a particular index to get printed.
+% Write
+% @unnumbered Function Index
+% @printindex fn
+
+\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
+
+\def\doprintindex#1{%
+ \tex
+ \dobreak \chapheadingskip {10000}
+ \catcode`\%=\other\catcode`\&=\other\catcode`\#=\other
+ \catcode`\$=\other
+ \catcode`\~=\other
+ \indexbreaks
+ %
+ % The following don't help, since the chars were translated
+ % when the raw index was written, and their fonts were discarded
+ % due to \indexnofonts.
+ %\catcode`\"=\active
+ %\catcode`\^=\active
+ %\catcode`\_=\active
+ %\catcode`\|=\active
+ %\catcode`\<=\active
+ %\catcode`\>=\active
+ % %
+ \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}
+ \indexfonts\rm \tolerance=9500 \advance\baselineskip -1pt
+ \begindoublecolumns
+ %
+ % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
+ \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
+ \ifeof 1
+ % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
+ % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
+ % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
+ % there is some text.
+ (Index is nonexistent)
+ \else
+ %
+ % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
+ % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
+ % it can discover if there is anything in it.
+ \read 1 to \temp
+ \ifeof 1
+ (Index is empty)
+ \else
+ \input \jobname.#1s
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \closein 1
+ \enddoublecolumns
+ \Etex
+}
+
+% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
+% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
+
+% Same as \bigskipamount except no shrink.
+% \balancecolumns gets confused if there is any shrink.
+\newskip\initialskipamount \initialskipamount 12pt plus4pt
+
+\def\initial #1{%
+{\let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
+\ifdim\lastskip<\initialskipamount
+\removelastskip \penalty-200 \vskip \initialskipamount\fi
+\line{\secbf#1\hfill}\kern 2pt\penalty10000}}
+
+% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
+% flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents
+% entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
+%
+\def\entry #1#2{\begingroup
+ %
+ % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
+ % affect previous text.
+ \par
+ %
+ % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
+ \parfillskip = 0in
+ %
+ % No extra space above this paragraph.
+ \parskip = 0in
+ %
+ % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
+ \finalhyphendemerits = 0
+ %
+ % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
+ % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
+ % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
+ % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
+ % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
+ %
+ % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
+ % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
+ \hangindent=2em
+ %
+ % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
+ % with blank space.
+ \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
+ %
+ % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
+ % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
+ \noindent
+ %
+ % Insert the text of the index entry. TeX will do line-breaking on it.
+ #1%
+ % The following is kluged to not output a line of dots in the index if
+ % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
+ % cursed by a Unix daemon.
+ \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
+ \def\tempb{#2}%
+ \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
+ \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
+ \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
+ %
+ % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
+ % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
+ % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
+ \hfil\penalty50
+ \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
+ %
+ % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
+ % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
+ % \hbox ensues.
+ \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
+ \fi%
+ \par
+\endgroup}
+
+% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
+\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
+ \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu . \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
+
+\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
+
+\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
+
+\def\secondary #1#2{
+{\parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in
+\hangindent =1in \hangafter=1
+\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par
+}}
+
+%% Define two-column mode, which is used in indexes.
+%% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416.
+\catcode `\@=11
+
+\newbox\partialpage
+
+\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
+
+\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup
+ % Grab any single-column material above us.
+ \output = {\global\setbox\partialpage
+ =\vbox{\unvbox255\kern -\topskip \kern \baselineskip}}%
+ \eject
+ %
+ % Now switch to the double-column output routine.
+ \output={\doublecolumnout}%
+ %
+ % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
+ % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
+ % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
+ % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
+ % execution time, so we may as well do it once.
+ %
+ % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
+ % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
+ % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
+ % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +- <
+ % 1pt) as it did when we hard-coded it.
+ %
+ % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
+ % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
+ % been clobbered.
+ %
+ \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
+ \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
+ \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
+ \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+ %
+ % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
+ % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
+ \vsize = 2\vsize
+ \doublecolumnpagegoal
+}
+
+\def\enddoublecolumns{\eject \endgroup \pagegoal=\vsize \unvbox\partialpage}
+
+\def\doublecolumnsplit{\splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
+ \global\dimen@=\pageheight \global\advance\dimen@ by-\ht\partialpage
+ \global\setbox1=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \global\setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox1}
+ \global\setbox3=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \global\setbox2=\vbox{\unvbox3}
+ \ifdim\ht0>\dimen@ \setbox255=\vbox{\unvbox0\unvbox2} \global\setbox255=\copy5 \fi
+ \ifdim\ht2>\dimen@ \setbox255=\vbox{\unvbox0\unvbox2} \global\setbox255=\copy5 \fi
+}
+\def\doublecolumnpagegoal{%
+ \dimen@=\vsize \advance\dimen@ by-2\ht\partialpage \global\pagegoal=\dimen@
+}
+\def\pagesofar{\unvbox\partialpage %
+ \hsize=\doublecolumnhsize % have to restore this since output routine
+ \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}}
+\def\doublecolumnout{%
+ \setbox5=\copy255
+ {\vbadness=10000 \doublecolumnsplit}
+ \ifvbox255
+ \setbox0=\vtop to\dimen@{\unvbox0}
+ \setbox2=\vtop to\dimen@{\unvbox2}
+ \onepageout\pagesofar \unvbox255 \penalty\outputpenalty
+ \else
+ \setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox5}
+ \ifvbox0
+ \dimen@=\ht0 \advance\dimen@ by\topskip \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
+ \divide\dimen@ by2 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
+ {\vbadness=10000
+ \loop \global\setbox5=\copy0
+ \setbox1=\vsplit5 to\dimen@
+ \setbox3=\vsplit5 to\dimen@
+ \ifvbox5 \global\advance\dimen@ by1pt \repeat
+ \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}
+ \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}
+ \global\setbox\partialpage=\vbox{\pagesofar}
+ \doublecolumnpagegoal
+ }
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+
+\catcode `\@=\other
+\message{sectioning,}
+% Define chapters, sections, etc.
+
+\newcount \chapno
+\newcount \secno \secno=0
+\newcount \subsecno \subsecno=0
+\newcount \subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
+
+% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
+\newcount \appendixno \appendixno = `\@
+\def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
+
+\newwrite \contentsfile
+% This is called from \setfilename.
+\def\opencontents{\openout \contentsfile = \jobname.toc}
+
+% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
+% page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise
+
+\def\thischapter{} \def\thissection{}
+\def\seccheck#1{\if \pageno<0 %
+\errmessage{@#1 not allowed after generating table of contents}\fi
+%
+}
+
+\def\chapternofonts{%
+\let\rawbackslash=\relax%
+\let\frenchspacing=\relax%
+\def\result{\realbackslash result}
+\def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}
+\def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}
+\def\print{\realbackslash print}
+\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}
+\def\dots{\realbackslash dots}
+\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}
+\def\tt{\realbackslash tt}
+\def\bf{\realbackslash bf }
+\def\w{\realbackslash w}
+\def\less{\realbackslash less}
+\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}
+\def\hat{\realbackslash hat}
+\def\char{\realbackslash char}
+\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}
+\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}
+\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}
+\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}
+\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}
+\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}
+\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}
+\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}
+% These are redefined because @smartitalic wouldn't work inside xdef.
+\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}
+\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}
+\def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}
+\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}
+\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}
+}
+
+\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
+\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
+
+% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
+\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
+\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
+
+% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
+\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
+\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
+
+% Choose a numbered-heading macro
+% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
+% #2 is text for heading
+\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+ \chapterzzz{#2}
+\or
+ \seczzz{#2}
+\or
+ \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+ \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+ \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+ \chapterzzz{#2}
+ \else
+ \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+ \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
+\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+ \appendixzzz{#2}
+\or
+ \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
+\or
+ \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+ \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+ \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+ \appendixzzz{#2}
+ \else
+ \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+ \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
+\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+ \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+\or
+ \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
+\or
+ \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+ \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+ \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+ \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+ \else
+ \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+ \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+
+\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
+\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
+\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
+\def\chapterzzz #1{\seccheck{chapter}%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+\global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{Chapter \the\chapno}%
+\chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
+% because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
+\xdef\thischapter{Chapter \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash chapentry {#1}{\the\chapno}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\donoderef %
+\global\let\section = \numberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+}}
+
+\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
+\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
+\def\appendixzzz #1{\seccheck{appendix}%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+\global\advance \appendixno by 1 \message{Appendix \appendixletter}%
+\chapmacro {#1}{Appendix \appendixletter}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+\xdef\thischapter{Appendix \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash chapentry
+ {#1}{Appendix \appendixletter}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\appendixnoderef %
+\global\let\section = \appendixsec
+\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
+}}
+
+\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
+\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
+\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
+\def\unnumberedzzz #1{\seccheck{unnumbered}%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+%
+% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
+% argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
+% expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
+% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
+% to be executed, not expanded).
+%
+% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
+% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
+% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
+% simply yielding the contents of the <toks register>.
+\toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
+%
+\unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
+\gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry {#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\unnumbnoderef %
+\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
+}}
+
+\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
+\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
+\def\seczzz #1{\seccheck{section}%
+\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash secentry %
+{#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\donoderef %
+\penalty 10000 %
+}}
+
+\outer\def\appenixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
+\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
+\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsection}%
+\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash secentry %
+{#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\appendixnoderef %
+\penalty 10000 %
+}}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
+\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsec}%
+\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\unnumbnoderef %
+\penalty 10000 %
+}}
+
+\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
+\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{subsection}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
+\subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsecentry %
+{#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\donoderef %
+\penalty 10000 %
+}}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsubsec}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
+\subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsecentry %
+{#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\appendixnoderef %
+\penalty 10000 %
+}}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsubsec}%
+\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry{#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\unnumbnoderef %
+\penalty 10000 %
+}}
+
+\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{subsubsection}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
+\subsubsecheading {#1}
+ {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsubsecentry %
+ {#1}
+ {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}
+ {\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\donoderef %
+\penalty 10000 %
+}}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsubsubsec}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
+\subsubsecheading {#1}
+ {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{#1}%
+ {\appendixletter}
+ {\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\appendixnoderef %
+\penalty 10000 %
+}}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsubsubsec}%
+\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+{\chapternofonts%
+\edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry{#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+\escapechar=`\\%
+\write \contentsfile \temp %
+\unnumbnoderef %
+\penalty 10000 %
+}}
+
+% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
+% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
+\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
+\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
+
+\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
+\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
+\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
+\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
+
+\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
+\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
+\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
+\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
+
+% These macros control what the section commands do, according
+% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
+% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
+\global\let\section = \numberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+
+% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
+
+% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and
+% such:
+% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
+% overlong headings to fold.
+% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
+% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
+% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
+% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
+
+
+\def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
+\def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
+{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
+{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+ \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+ \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+
+\def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
+\def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
+{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+ \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+ \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+
+\def\heading{\parsearg\secheadingi}
+
+\def\subheading{\parsearg\subsecheadingi}
+
+\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\subsubsecheadingi}
+
+% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
+% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
+% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
+
+%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
+\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
+
+\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
+
+%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
+% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
+
+\newskip \chapheadingskip \chapheadingskip = 30pt plus 8pt minus 4pt
+
+\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
+\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
+\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
+
+\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGoff{
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGon{
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGodd{
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
+
+\CHAPPAGon
+
+\def\CHAPFplain{
+\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
+\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain}
+
+\def\chfplain #1#2{%
+ \pchapsepmacro
+ {%
+ \chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+ \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+ \rm #2\enspace #1}%
+ }%
+ \bigskip
+ \penalty5000
+}
+
+\def\unnchfplain #1{%
+\pchapsepmacro %
+{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+ \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+ \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 10000 %
+}
+\CHAPFplain % The default
+
+\def\unnchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+ \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+ \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 10000 %
+}
+
+\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
+\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
+\par\penalty 5000 %
+}
+
+\def\CHAPFopen{
+\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
+\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen}
+
+% Parameter controlling skip before section headings.
+
+\newskip \subsecheadingskip \subsecheadingskip = 17pt plus 8pt minus 4pt
+\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
+
+\newskip \secheadingskip \secheadingskip = 21pt plus 8pt minus 4pt
+\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
+
+% @paragraphindent is defined for the Info formatting commands only.
+\let\paragraphindent=\comment
+
+% Section fonts are the base font at magstep2, which produces
+% a size a bit more than 14 points in the default situation.
+
+\def\secheading #1#2#3{\secheadingi {#2.#3\enspace #1}}
+\def\plainsecheading #1{\secheadingi {#1}}
+\def\secheadingi #1{{\advance \secheadingskip by \parskip %
+\secheadingbreak}%
+{\secfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+ \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+ \rm #1\hfill}}%
+\ifdim \parskip<10pt \kern 10pt\kern -\parskip\fi \penalty 10000 }
+
+
+% Subsection fonts are the base font at magstep1,
+% which produces a size of 12 points.
+
+\def\subsecheading #1#2#3#4{\subsecheadingi {#2.#3.#4\enspace #1}}
+\def\subsecheadingi #1{{\advance \subsecheadingskip by \parskip %
+\subsecheadingbreak}%
+{\subsecfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+ \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+ \rm #1\hfill}}%
+\ifdim \parskip<10pt \kern 10pt\kern -\parskip\fi \penalty 10000 }
+
+\def\subsubsecfonts{\subsecfonts} % Maybe this should change:
+ % Perhaps make sssec fonts scaled
+ % magstep half
+\def\subsubsecheading #1#2#3#4#5{\subsubsecheadingi {#2.#3.#4.#5\enspace #1}}
+\def\subsubsecheadingi #1{{\advance \subsecheadingskip by \parskip %
+\subsecheadingbreak}%
+{\subsubsecfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+ \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+ \rm #1\hfill}}%
+\ifdim \parskip<10pt \kern 10pt\kern -\parskip\fi \penalty 10000}
+
+
+\message{toc printing,}
+
+% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
+% to \contentsfile.
+
+\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
+\def\startcontents#1{%
+ \pagealignmacro
+ \immediate\closeout \contentsfile
+ \ifnum \pageno>0
+ \pageno = -1 % Request roman numbered pages.
+ \fi
+ % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
+ % It is abundantly clear what they are.
+ \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
+ \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
+ \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11
+ \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
+ \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
+}
+
+
+% Normal (long) toc.
+\outer\def\contents{%
+ \startcontents{Table of Contents}%
+ \input \jobname.toc
+ \endgroup
+ \vfill \eject
+}
+
+% And just the chapters.
+\outer\def\summarycontents{%
+ \startcontents{Short Contents}%
+ %
+ \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
+ \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
+ % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
+ \secfonts
+ \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
+ \rm
+ \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
+ \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
+ \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{}
+ \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
+ \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{}
+ \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
+ \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{}
+ \input \jobname.toc
+ \endgroup
+ \vfill \eject
+}
+\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
+
+% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
+% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
+% The last argument is the page number.
+% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
+
+% Chapter-level things, for both the long and short contents.
+\def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
+
+% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings
+\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
+ \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno{#3}}%
+}
+
+% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
+% The arg is, e.g. `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
+% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
+% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
+% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm Appendix }
+\newdimen\shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth = \wd0
+
+\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
+ % We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of
+ % #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned.
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{#1}%
+ \dimen0 = \ifdim\wd0 > \shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth \else 0pt \fi
+ %
+ % This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the
+ % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
+ % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
+ % the label; that gets put in in \shortchapentry above.)
+ \advance\dimen0 by 1.1em
+ \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}%
+}
+
+\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
+\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno{#2}}}
+
+% Sections.
+\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\def\unnumbsecentry#1#2{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+% Subsections.
+\def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
+\def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+% And subsubsections.
+\def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+ \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
+\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+
+% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
+\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
+
+% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
+% page number.
+%
+% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we would want to be at chapters
+% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
+\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
+ \penalty-300 \vskip\baselineskip
+ \begingroup
+ \chapentryfonts
+ \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+ \endgroup
+ \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip
+}
+
+\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+ \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
+ \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+ \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
+ \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+ \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
+ \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
+% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We
+% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
+% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
+%
+\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
+ \hyphenpenalty = 10000
+ \entry{#1}{#2}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
+\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
+
+\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+
+\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
+\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+\let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+
+
+\message{environments,}
+
+% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
+% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
+% Furthermore, these definitions must come after we define our fonts.
+\newbox\dblarrowbox \newbox\longdblarrowbox
+\newbox\pushcharbox \newbox\bullbox
+\newbox\equivbox \newbox\errorbox
+
+\let\ptexequiv = \equiv
+
+%{\tentt
+%\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\pushcharbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\equivbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}
+% Adapted from the manmac format (p.420 of TeXbook)
+%\global\setbox\bullbox = \hbox to 1em{\kern.15em\vrule height .75ex width .85ex
+% depth .1ex\hfil}
+%}
+
+\def\point{$\star$}
+
+\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
+\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
+\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
+
+\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
+
+% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
+{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
+\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
+% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
+
+\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
+ \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
+ \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
+ \vbox{
+ \hrule height\dimen2
+ \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
+ \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
+ \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
+ \hrule height\dimen2}
+ \hfil}
+
+% The @error{} command.
+\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
+
+% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
+% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
+% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
+
+\def\tex{\begingroup
+\catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
+\catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
+\catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
+\catcode `\%=14
+\catcode 43=12
+\catcode`\"=12
+\catcode`\==12
+\catcode`\|=12
+\catcode`\<=12
+\catcode`\>=12
+\escapechar=`\\
+%
+\let\{=\ptexlbrace
+\let\}=\ptexrbrace
+\let\.=\ptexdot
+\let\*=\ptexstar
+\let\dots=\ptexdots
+\def\@{@}%
+\let\bullet=\ptexbullet
+\let\b=\ptexb \let\c=\ptexc \let\i=\ptexi \let\t=\ptext \let\l=\ptexl
+\let\L=\ptexL
+%
+\let\Etex=\endgroup}
+
+% Define @lisp ... @endlisp.
+% @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
+% including the definition of @endlisp (which normally is erroneous).
+
+% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
+\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
+
+% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
+% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
+% have any width.
+\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
+
+% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
+% space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
+% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
+% should produce a line of output anyway.
+%
+{\obeyspaces %
+\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
+
+% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is. This is
+% for use in \parsearg.
+{\sepspaces%
+\global\let\obeyedspace= }
+
+% This space is always present above and below environments.
+\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
+
+% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
+% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
+% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
+% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
+%
+\def\aboveenvbreak{{\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
+\endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
+\removelastskip \penalty-50 \vskip\envskipamount \fi}}
+
+\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
+
+% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
+\let\nonarrowing=\relax
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around argument
+\font\circle=lcircle10
+\newdimen\circthick
+\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
+\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
+\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
+%
+\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
+\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
+\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
+\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
+\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+ \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
+ \hskip\rskip}}
+\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+ \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
+ \hskip\rskip}}
+%
+\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
+
+\long\def\cartouche{%
+\begingroup
+ \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
+ \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
+ \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
+ \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
+ \cartouter=\hsize
+ \advance\cartouter by 18pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
+% side, and for 6pt waste from
+% each corner char
+ \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
+ % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
+ \let\nonarrowing=\comment
+ \vbox\bgroup
+ \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
+ \carttop
+ \hbox\bgroup
+ \hskip\lskip
+ \vrule\kern3pt
+ \vbox\bgroup
+ \hsize=\cartinner
+ \kern3pt
+ \begingroup
+ \baselineskip=\normbskip
+ \lineskip=\normlskip
+ \parskip=\normpskip
+ \vskip -\parskip
+\def\Ecartouche{%
+ \endgroup
+ \kern3pt
+ \egroup
+ \kern3pt\vrule
+ \hskip\rskip
+ \egroup
+ \cartbot
+ \egroup
+\endgroup
+}}
+
+
+% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
+% inside a group.
+\def\nonfillstart{%
+ \aboveenvbreak
+ \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
+ \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
+ \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
+ \singlespace
+ \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
+ \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
+ \parskip = 0pt
+ \parindent = 0pt
+ \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
+ % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
+ % at next level down.
+ \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+ \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+ \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
+ \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
+ \let\nonarrowing=\relax
+ \fi
+}
+
+% To ending an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph
+% (via \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we
+% keep the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue
+% will be inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the
+% document, after the environment.
+%
+\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+
+% This macro is
+\def\lisp{\begingroup
+ \nonfillstart
+ \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
+ \tt
+ \rawbackslash % have \ input char produce \ char from current font
+ \gobble
+}
+
+% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the
+% environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
+%
+% We must call \lisp last in the definition, since it reads the
+% return following the @example (or whatever) command.
+%
+\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+\def\smallexample{\begingroup \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+\def\smalllisp{\begingroup \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+
+% @smallexample and @smalllisp. This is not used unless the @smallbook
+% command is given. Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
+%
+\def\smalllispx{\begingroup
+ \nonfillstart
+ \let\Esmalllisp = \nonfillfinish
+ \let\Esmallexample = \nonfillfinish
+ %
+ % Smaller interline space and fonts for small examples.
+ \baselineskip 10pt
+ \indexfonts \tt
+ \rawbackslash % output the \ character from the current font
+ \gobble
+}
+
+% This is @display; same as @lisp except use roman font.
+%
+\def\display{\begingroup
+ \nonfillstart
+ \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
+ \gobble
+}
+
+% This is @format; same as @display except don't narrow margins.
+%
+\def\format{\begingroup
+ \let\nonarrowing = t
+ \nonfillstart
+ \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
+ \gobble
+}
+
+% @flushleft (same as @format) and @flushright.
+%
+\def\flushleft{\begingroup
+ \let\nonarrowing = t
+ \nonfillstart
+ \let\Eflushleft = \nonfillfinish
+ \gobble
+}
+\def\flushright{\begingroup
+ \let\nonarrowing = t
+ \nonfillstart
+ \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
+ \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
+ \gobble}
+
+% @quotation does normal linebreaking and narrows the margins.
+%
+\def\quotation{%
+\begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
+{\parskip=0pt % because we will skip by \parskip too, later
+\aboveenvbreak}%
+\singlespace
+\parindent=0pt
+\let\Equotation = \nonfillfinish
+% @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
+% at next level down.
+\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+\advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+\advance \rightskip by \lispnarrowing
+\exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
+\let\nonarrowing=\relax
+\fi}
+
+\message{defuns,}
+% Define formatter for defuns
+% First, allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
+\def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
+
+\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
+\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
+\newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
+\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
+
+\newcount\parencount
+% define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
+% \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
+\def\activeparens{%
+\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
+\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
+
+% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
+\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
+
+{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
+
+% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
+% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
+% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
+\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
+\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
+
+\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
+\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
+
+% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
+% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
+\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested %
+\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+%
+% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
+\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+%
+\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
+% also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
+\ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
+\global\advance \parencount by -1 }
+% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
+\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\&#1}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
+%
+\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
+} % End of definition inside \activeparens
+%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
+%% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ]
+\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}} \def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}} \def\ampnr{\&}
+\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}} \def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
+
+% First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
+% #1 should be the function name.
+% #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
+
+\def\defname #1#2{%
+% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
+% outside the @def...
+\dimen2=\leftskip
+\advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
+\dimen3=\rightskip
+\advance\dimen3 by -\defbodyindent
+\noindent %
+\setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
+\dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
+\dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
+\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1 %
+% Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
+% ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
+% but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
+{% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
+% so that \rightline will obey them.
+\advance \hsize by -\dimen2 \advance \hsize by -\dimen3
+\rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}}}%
+% Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
+\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
+\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+{\df #1}\enskip % Generate function name
+}
+
+% Actually process the body of a definition
+% #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun.
+% #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx.
+% #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header,
+% such as \defunheader.
+
+\def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup %
+\catcode 61=\active % 61 is `='
+\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}
+
+\def\defmethparsebody #1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}}
+
+\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
+
+% These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
+% except that they do not make parens into active characters.
+% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
+
+\def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup %
+\catcode 61=\active %
+\obeylines\spacesplit#3}
+
+% This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody. It could probably be used for
+% some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals.
+%
+\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
+ \begingroup\inENV %
+ \medbreak %
+ % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+ % so that it will exit this group.
+ \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+ \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+ \parindent=0in
+ \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent
+ \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+ \begingroup\obeylines
+}
+
+\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
+ \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
+}
+
+% This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
+% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
+% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument. Sigh.
+% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
+%
+% So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name. That
+% way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
+% won't strip off the braces.
+%
+\def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
+ \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
+}
+
+% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
+% braces (if any). That's what this does, putting the result in \tptemp.
+%
+\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{\def\tptemp{#1}}%
+
+% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
+% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
+% (which might be empty) the arguments.
+%
+\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
+ \removeemptybraces#2\relax
+ #1{\tptemp}{#3}%
+}%
+
+\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
+\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
+
+% Split up #2 at the first space token.
+% call #1 with two arguments:
+% the first is all of #2 before the space token,
+% the second is all of #2 after that space token.
+% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
+% and the second is passed as empty.
+
+{\obeylines
+\gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
+\long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
+\ifx\relax #3%
+#1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
+
+% So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions.
+
+% Define @defun.
+
+% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
+% Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
+
+\def\defunargs #1{\functionparens \sl
+% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
+\hyphenchar\tensl=0
+#1%
+\hyphenchar\tensl=45
+\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{unbalanced parens in @def arguments}\fi%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+\endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000%
+}
+
+\def\deftypefunargs #1{%
+% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
+\functionparens
+\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+\endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000%
+}
+
+% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
+
+% @deffn Command forward-char nchars
+
+\def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
+
+\def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defun == @deffn Function
+
+\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
+
+\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{Function}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+
+\def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
+
+% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name and args.
+\def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
+% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
+\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
+\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {\code{#1} #2}{Function}%
+\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+
+\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
+
+% #1 is the classification. #2 is the data type. #3 is the name and args.
+\def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
+% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
+\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup
+\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
+% at least some C++ text from working
+\defname {\code{#2} #3}{#1}%
+\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defmac == @deffn Macro
+
+\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
+
+\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{Macro}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defspec == @deffn Special Form
+
+\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
+
+\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{Special Form}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% This definition is run if you use @defunx
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
+
+\def\deffnx #1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
+\def\defunx #1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
+\def\defmacx #1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
+\def\defspecx #1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypefnx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypeunx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypeunx in invalid context}}
+
+% @defmethod, and so on
+
+% @defop {Funny Method} foo-class frobnicate argument
+
+\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
+\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
+
+\def\defopheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{on #1}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype{} on #1}%
+\defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @defmethod == @defop Method
+
+\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
+
+\def\defmethodheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{on #1}% entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{Method on #1}%
+\defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
+
+\def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
+\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
+
+\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype{} of #1}%
+\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @defivar == @defcv {Instance Variable}
+
+\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
+
+\def\defivarheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{Instance Variable of #1}%
+\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% These definitions are run if you use @defmethodx, etc.,
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defmethod, etc.
+
+\def\defopx #1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
+\def\defmethodx #1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
+\def\defcvx #1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
+\def\defivarx #1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
+
+% Now @defvar
+
+% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
+% This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
+% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
+\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000}
+
+% @defvr Counter foo-count
+
+\def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
+
+\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
+
+% @defvar == @defvr Variable
+
+\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
+
+\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{Variable}%
+\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
+
+\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
+
+\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{User Option}%
+\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @deftypevar int foobar
+
+\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
+
+% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name.
+\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
+\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in variables index
+\begingroup\defname {\code{#1} #2}{Variable}%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000
+\endgroup}
+
+% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
+
+\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
+
+\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#3}}%
+\begingroup\defname {\code{#2} #3}{#1}
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000
+\endgroup}
+
+% This definition is run if you use @defvarx
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defvar or @defvarx.
+
+\def\defvrx #1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
+\def\defvarx #1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
+\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypevarx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypevrx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
+
+% Now define @deftp
+% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
+
+\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
+
+% @deftp Class window height width ...
+
+\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
+
+\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
+
+% This definition is run if you use @deftpx, etc
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @deftp, etc.
+
+\def\deftpx #1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
+
+\message{cross reference,}
+% Define cross-reference macros
+\newwrite \auxfile
+
+\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
+\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
+
+% \setref{foo} defines a cross-reference point named foo.
+
+\def\setref#1{%
+\dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
+\dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
+\dosetq{#1-snt}{Ysectionnumberandtype}}
+
+\def\unnumbsetref#1{%
+\dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
+\dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
+\dosetq{#1-snt}{Ynothing}}
+
+\def\appendixsetref#1{%
+\dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
+\dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
+\dosetq{#1-snt}{Yappendixletterandtype}}
+
+% \xref, \pxref, and \ref generate cross-references to specified points.
+% For \xrefX, #1 is the node name, #2 the name of the Info
+% cross-reference, #3 the printed node name, #4 the name of the Info
+% file, #5 the name of the printed manual. All but the node name can be
+% omitted.
+%
+\def\pxref#1{see \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xref#1{See \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup%
+\def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
+\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
+%
+\setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
+\setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
+\ifdim \wd0=0pt%
+% No printed node name was explicitly given.
+\ifx SETxref-automatic-section-title %
+% This line should make the actual chapter or section title appear inside
+% the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
+\ifdim \wd1>0pt%
+% It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
+\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1} \else%
+% We know the real title if we have the xref values.
+\ifhavexrefs \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}}%
+% Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
+\else \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1} \fi%
+\fi\def\printednodename{#1-title}%
+\else% This line just uses the node name.
+\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+\fi% ends \ifx SETxref-automatic-section-title
+\fi% ends \ifdim \wd0
+%
+%
+% If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does
+% not insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it
+% will not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some
+% manuals are best written with fairly long node names, containing
+% hyphens, this is a loss. Therefore, we simply give the text of
+% the node name again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first
+% time.
+\ifdim \wd1>0pt
+section ``\printednodename'' in \cite{\printedmanual}%
+\else%
+\turnoffactive%
+\refx{#1-snt}{} [\printednodename], page\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
+\fi
+\endgroup}
+
+% \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
+
+% Use \turnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
+% work in node names.
+\def\dosetq #1#2{{\let\folio=0 \turnoffactive%
+\edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq {#1}{#2}}}%
+\next}}
+
+% \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
+% CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
+% When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
+
+\def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
+
+% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
+
+\def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
+
+\def\Ytitle{\thissection}
+
+\def\Ynothing{}
+
+\def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
+\ifnum\secno=0 Chapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
+\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 Section\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
+\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
+Section\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
+\else %
+Section\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
+\fi \fi \fi }
+
+\def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
+\ifnum\secno=0 Appendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
+\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 Section\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
+\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
+Section\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
+\else %
+Section\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
+\fi \fi \fi }
+
+\gdef\xreftie{'tie}
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
+% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+%
+\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
+ \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
+\else
+ \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
+\fi
+
+% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
+% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
+
+\def\refx#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
+ % If not defined, say something at least.
+ $\langle$un\-de\-fined$\rangle$%
+ \ifhavexrefs
+ \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
+ \else
+ \ifwarnedxrefs\else
+ \global\warnedxrefstrue
+ \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % It's defined, so just use it.
+ \csname X#1\endcsname
+ \fi
+ #2% Output the suffix in any case.
+}
+
+% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
+
+% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
+\def\xrdef #1#2{
+{\catcode`\'=\other\expandafter \gdef \csname X#1\endcsname {#2}}}
+
+\def\readauxfile{%
+\begingroup
+\catcode `\^^@=\other
+\catcode `\=\other
+\catcode `\=\other
+\catcode `\^^C=\other
+\catcode `\^^D=\other
+\catcode `\^^E=\other
+\catcode `\^^F=\other
+\catcode `\^^G=\other
+\catcode `\^^H=\other
+\catcode `\ =\other
+\catcode `\^^L=\other
+\catcode `\=\other
+\catcode `\=\other
+\catcode `\=\other
+\catcode `\=\other
+\catcode `\=\other
+\catcode `\=\other
+\catcode `\=\other
+\catcode `\=\other
+\catcode `\=\other
+\catcode `\=\other
+\catcode `\=\other
+\catcode `\=\other
+\catcode 26=\other
+\catcode `\^^[=\other
+\catcode `\^^\=\other
+\catcode `\^^]=\other
+\catcode `\^^^=\other
+\catcode `\^^_=\other
+\catcode `\@=\other
+\catcode `\^=\other
+\catcode `\~=\other
+\catcode `\[=\other
+\catcode `\]=\other
+\catcode`\"=\other
+\catcode`\_=\other
+\catcode`\|=\other
+\catcode`\<=\other
+\catcode`\>=\other
+\catcode `\$=\other
+\catcode `\#=\other
+\catcode `\&=\other
+% `\+ does not work, so use 43.
+\catcode 43=\other
+% the aux file uses ' as the escape.
+% Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
+% entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
+% For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
+% Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
+% but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
+\catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
+\catcode `\%=\other
+\catcode `\'=0
+\catcode `\\=\other
+\openin 1 \jobname.aux
+\ifeof 1 \else \closein 1 \input \jobname.aux \global\havexrefstrue
+\global\warnedobstrue
+\fi
+% Open the new aux file. Tex will close it automatically at exit.
+\openout \auxfile=\jobname.aux
+\endgroup}
+
+
+% Footnotes.
+
+\newcount \footnoteno
+
+% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
+% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
+% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
+% removed.
+\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
+
+% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only..
+\let\footnotestyle=\comment
+
+\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
+
+{\catcode `\@=11
+%
+% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
+\gdef\footnote{%
+ \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
+ \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
+ %
+ % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
+ % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
+ \let\@sf\empty
+ \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
+ %
+ % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
+ \unskip
+ \thisfootno\@sf
+ \footnotezzz
+}%
+
+% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
+% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
+%
+\long\gdef\footnotezzz#1{\insert\footins{%
+ % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
+ % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
+ % So reset some parameters.
+ \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+ \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
+ \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
+ \floatingpenalty\@MM
+ \leftskip\z@skip
+ \rightskip\z@skip
+ \spaceskip\z@skip
+ \xspaceskip\z@skip
+ \parindent\defaultparindent
+ %
+ % Hang the footnote text off the number.
+ \hang
+ \textindent{\thisfootno}%
+ %
+ % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
+ % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
+ % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
+ \footstrut
+ #1\strut}%
+}
+
+}%end \catcode `\@=11
+
+% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
+% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
+% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
+%
+\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
+\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
+\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
+%
+\def\setleading#1{%
+ \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
+ \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
+ \normalbaselines
+ \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
+ \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
+ depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
+ }%
+}
+
+% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
+% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
+% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
+% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
+% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
+%
+\def\|{%
+ % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
+ \leavevmode
+ %
+ % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
+ \vadjust{%
+ % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
+ % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
+ \vskip-\baselineskip
+ %
+ % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
+ % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
+ \llap{%
+ %
+ % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
+ \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
+ %
+ % This is the space between the bar and the text.
+ \hskip 12pt
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+
+% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
+% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
+% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
+%
+\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
+
+
+% End of control word definitions.
+
+\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
+
+\def\openindices{%
+ \newindex{cp}%
+ \newcodeindex{fn}%
+ \newcodeindex{vr}%
+ \newcodeindex{tp}%
+ \newcodeindex{ky}%
+ \newcodeindex{pg}%
+}
+
+% Set some numeric style parameters, for 8.5 x 11 format.
+
+%\hsize = 6.5in
+\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
+\parindent = \defaultparindent
+\parskip 18pt plus 1pt
+\setleading{15pt}
+\advance\topskip by 1.2cm
+
+% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
+\vbadness=10000
+
+% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
+\widowpenalty=10000
+\clubpenalty=10000
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
+% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
+% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
+% \hsize. This makes it come to about 9pt for the 8.5x11 format.
+%
+\ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
+ % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
+ \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
+\else
+ \emergencystretch = \hsize
+ \divide\emergencystretch by 45
+\fi
+
+% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 format (or else 7x9.25)
+\def\smallbook{
+
+% These values for secheadingskip and subsecheadingskip are
+% experiments. RJC 7 Aug 1992
+\global\secheadingskip = 17pt plus 6pt minus 3pt
+\global\subsecheadingskip = 14pt plus 6pt minus 3pt
+
+\global\lispnarrowing = 0.3in
+\setleading{12pt}
+\advance\topskip by -1cm
+\global\parskip 3pt plus 1pt
+\global\hsize = 5in
+\global\vsize=7.5in
+\global\tolerance=700
+\global\hfuzz=1pt
+\global\contentsrightmargin=0pt
+
+\global\pagewidth=\hsize
+\global\pageheight=\vsize
+
+\global\let\smalllisp=\smalllispx
+\global\let\smallexample=\smalllispx
+\global\def\Esmallexample{\Esmalllisp}
+}
+
+% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
+\def\afourpaper{
+\global\tolerance=700
+\global\hfuzz=1pt
+\setleading{12pt}
+\global\parskip 15pt plus 1pt
+
+\global\vsize= 53\baselineskip
+\advance\vsize by \topskip
+%\global\hsize= 5.85in % A4 wide 10pt
+\global\hsize= 6.5in
+\global\outerhsize=\hsize
+\global\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
+\global\outervsize=\vsize
+\global\advance\outervsize by 0.6in
+
+\global\pagewidth=\hsize
+\global\pageheight=\vsize
+}
+
+% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
+\catcode`\"=\other
+\catcode`\~=\other
+\catcode`\^=\other
+\catcode`\_=\other
+\catcode`\|=\other
+\catcode`\<=\other
+\catcode`\>=\other
+\catcode`\+=\other
+\def\normaldoublequote{"}
+\def\normaltilde{~}
+\def\normalcaret{^}
+\def\normalunderscore{_}
+\def\normalverticalbar{|}
+\def\normalless{<}
+\def\normalgreater{>}
+\def\normalplus{+}
+
+% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
+% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
+% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
+%
+% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
+% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
+% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
+% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\the\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+
+% Turn off all special characters except @
+% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
+% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
+% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
+
+\catcode`\"=\active
+\def\activedoublequote{{\tt \char '042}}
+\let"=\activedoublequote
+\catcode`\~=\active
+\def~{{\tt \char '176}}
+\chardef\hat=`\^
+\catcode`\^=\active
+\def^{{\tt \hat}}
+
+\catcode`\_=\active
+\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
+% Subroutine for the previous macro.
+\def\_{\lvvmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
+
+% \lvvmode is equivalent in function to \leavevmode.
+% Using \leavevmode runs into trouble when written out to
+% an index file due to the expansion of \leavevmode into ``\unhbox
+% \voidb@x'' ---which looks to TeX like ``\unhbox \voidb\x'' due to our
+% magic tricks with @.
+\def\lvvmode{\vbox to 0pt{}}
+
+\catcode`\|=\active
+\def|{{\tt \char '174}}
+\chardef \less=`\<
+\catcode`\<=\active
+\def<{{\tt \less}}
+\chardef \gtr=`\>
+\catcode`\>=\active
+\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
+\catcode`\+=\active
+\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
+%\catcode 27=\active
+%\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
+
+% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
+% even after parsing them.
+\def\turnoffactive{\let"=\normaldoublequote
+\let~=\normaltilde
+\let^=\normalcaret
+\let_=\normalunderscore
+\let|=\normalverticalbar
+\let<=\normalless
+\let>=\normalgreater
+\let+=\normalplus}
+
+% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
+{\catcode`\==\active
+\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
+
+\catcode`\@=0
+
+% \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
+\global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
+%{\catcode`\\=\other
+%@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
+
+% \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
+{\catcode`\\=\active
+@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
+
+% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
+\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
+
+% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
+\escapechar=`\@
+
+% \catcode 17=0 % Define control-q
+\catcode`\\=\active
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
+% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
+% a backslash.
+%
+@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
+@global@let\ = @eatinput
+
+% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
+% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
+% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
+%
+@gdef@fixbackslash{@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi}
+
+%% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. The @rm below
+%% makes sure that the current font starts out as the newly loaded cmr10
+@catcode`@$=@other @catcode`@%=@other @catcode`@&=@other @catcode`@#=@other
+
+@textfonts
+@rm
+
+@c Local variables:
+@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
+@c End:
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/include/Makefile b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/include/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3b001abaaf0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/include/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+# Generated automatically from Makefile.in by configure.
+POSTGRESTOP=@POSTGRESERVER@
+POSTGRES_INCLUDE=$(POSTGRESTOP)/include
+
+all clean::
+ @echo Nothing to be done.
+
+install::
+ install ecpglib.h $(POSTGRES_INCLUDE)
+ install ecpgtype.h $(POSTGRES_INCLUDE)
+ install sqlca.h $(POSTGRES_INCLUDE)
+
+uninstall::
+ rm -f $(POSTGRES_INCLUDE)/ecpglib.h
+ rm -f $(POSTGRES_INCLUDE)/ecpgtype.h
+ rm -f $(POSTGRES_INCLUDE)/sqlca.h
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/include/Makefile.in b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/include/Makefile.in
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..80e0451e2b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/include/Makefile.in
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+POSTGRESTOP=@POSTGRESERVER@
+POSTGRES_INCLUDE=$(POSTGRESTOP)/include
+
+all clean::
+ @echo Nothing to be done.
+
+install::
+ install ecpglib.h $(POSTGRES_INCLUDE)
+ install ecpgtype.h $(POSTGRES_INCLUDE)
+ install sqlca.h $(POSTGRES_INCLUDE)
+
+uninstall::
+ rm -f $(POSTGRES_INCLUDE)/ecpglib.h
+ rm -f $(POSTGRES_INCLUDE)/ecpgtype.h
+ rm -f $(POSTGRES_INCLUDE)/sqlca.h
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/include/ecpglib.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/include/ecpglib.h
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b880182e0bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/include/ecpglib.h
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+#include <c.h>
+
+void ECPGdebug(int);
+bool ECPGconnect(const char * dbname);
+bool ECPGdo(int, char *, ...);
+bool ECPGcommit(int);
+bool ECPGrollback(int);
+bool ECPGfinish();
+bool ECPGstatus();
+
+void ECPGlog(const char * format, ...);
+
+#ifdef LIBPQ_FE_H
+bool ECPGsetdb(PGconn *);
+#endif
+
+/* Here are some methods used by the lib. */
+/* Returns a pointer to a string containing a simple type name. */
+const char * ECPGtype_name(enum ECPGttype);
+
+/* A generic varchar type. */
+struct ECPGgeneric_varchar {
+ int len;
+ char arr[1];
+};
+
+
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/include/ecpgtype.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/include/ecpgtype.h
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cc56b78cbb3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/include/ecpgtype.h
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+/*
+ * This file implements a data structure that is built and maintained by the
+ * preprocessor.
+ *
+ * All types that can be handled for host variable declarations has to
+ * be handled eventually.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Here are all the types that we are to handle. Note that it is the type
+ * that is registered and that has nothing whatsoever to do with the storage
+ * class.
+ *
+ * Simle types
+ * integers: char, short, int, long (signed and unsigned)
+ * floats: float, double
+ *
+ * Complex types:
+ * VARCHAR, VARCHAR2 - Strings with length (maxlen is given in the declaration)
+ * Arrays of simple types and of VARCHAR, VARCHAR2 (size given in declaration)
+ * Records build of simple types, arrays and other records.
+ *
+ * Complicating things:
+ * typedefs and struct names!
+ *
+ * Conclusion:
+ * This is a typically recursive definition. A structure of typed list elements
+ * would probably work fine:
+ */
+#include <stdio.h>
+
+enum ECPGttype {
+ ECPGt_char = 1, ECPGt_unsigned_char, ECPGt_short, ECPGt_unsigned_short,
+ ECPGt_int, ECPGt_unsigned_int, ECPGt_long, ECPGt_unsigned_long,
+ ECPGt_float, ECPGt_double,
+ ECPGt_varchar, ECPGt_varchar2,
+ ECPGt_array,
+ ECPGt_record,
+ ECPGt_EOIT, /* End of insert types. */
+ ECPGt_EORT /* End of result types. */
+
+};
+
+#define IS_SIMPLE_TYPE(type) ((type) >= ECPGt_char && (type) <= ECPGt_varchar2)
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/include/sqlca.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/include/sqlca.h
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0e7126e7b36
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/include/sqlca.h
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+#ifndef POSTGRES_SQLCA_H
+#define POSTGRES_SQLCA_H
+
+struct sqlca {
+ int sqlcode;
+ struct {
+ int sqlerrml;
+ char sqlerrmc[1000];
+ } sqlerrm;
+} sqlca;
+#endif
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/lib/Makefile b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/lib/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d227f6df364
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/lib/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+# Generated automatically from Makefile.in by configure.
+TOPDIR=/home/meskes/data/computer/databases/postgres/pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/../..
+PQ_INCLUDE=-I$(TOPDIR)/include -I$(TOPDIR)/interfaces/libpq
+POSTGRES_LIB=$(POSTGRESTOP)/lib
+
+all: lib
+
+lib: libecpg.a
+
+clean::
+ rm -f *.o *.a core a.out *~
+
+install:: libecpg.a
+ install -m644 libecpg.a $(POSTGRES_LIB)
+uninstall::
+ rm -f $(POSTGRES_LIB)/libecpg.a
+
+# Rules that do something
+libecpg.a : libecpg.a(ecpglib.o) libecpg.a(typename.o)
+
+ecpglib.o : ecpglib.c ../include/ecpglib.h ../include/ecpgtype.h
+ $(CC) -O2 -g -Wall -I../include $(PQ_INCLUDE) -c ecpglib.c
+typename.o : typename.c ../include/ecpgtype.h
+ $(CC) -g -O2 -Wall -I../include $(PQ_INCLUDE) -c typename.c
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/lib/Makefile.in b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/lib/Makefile.in
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..07d126bd5c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/lib/Makefile.in
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+TOPDIR=@TOPSRC@
+PQ_INCLUDE=-I$(TOPDIR)/include -I$(TOPDIR)/interfaces/libpq
+POSTGRES_LIB=$(POSTGRESTOP)/lib
+
+all: lib
+
+lib: libecpg.a
+
+clean::
+ rm -f *.o *.a core a.out *~
+
+install:: libecpg.a
+ install -m644 libecpg.a $(POSTGRES_LIB)
+uninstall::
+ rm -f $(POSTGRES_LIB)/libecpg.a
+
+# Rules that do something
+libecpg.a : libecpg.a(ecpglib.o) libecpg.a(typename.o)
+
+ecpglib.o : ecpglib.c ../include/ecpglib.h ../include/ecpgtype.h
+ $(CC) -O2 -g -Wall -I../include $(PQ_INCLUDE) -c ecpglib.c
+typename.o : typename.c ../include/ecpgtype.h
+ $(CC) -g -O2 -Wall -I../include $(PQ_INCLUDE) -c typename.c
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/lib/ecpglib.c b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/lib/ecpglib.c
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d2c078e2d01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/lib/ecpglib.c
@@ -0,0 +1,609 @@
+/* Copyright comment */
+/*
+ * The aim is to get a simpler inteface to the database routines.
+ * All the tidieous messing around with tuples is supposed to be hidden
+ * by this function.
+ */
+/* Author: Linus Tolke
+ (actually most if the code is "borrowed" from the distribution and just
+ slightly modified)
+ */
+
+/* Taken over as part of PostgreSQL by Michael Meskes <meskes@debian.org>
+ on Feb. 5th, 1998 */
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include <ecpgtype.h>
+#include <ecpglib.h>
+#include <sqlca.h>
+#include <libpq-fe.h>
+#include <libpq/pqcomm.h>
+
+static PGconn * simple_connection;
+static int simple_debug = 0;
+static int committed = true;
+
+static void
+register_error(int code, char *fmt, ...)
+{
+ va_list args;
+
+ sqlca.sqlcode = code;
+ va_start (args, fmt);
+ vsprintf (sqlca.sqlerrm.sqlerrmc, fmt, args);
+ va_end (args);
+ sqlca.sqlerrm.sqlerrml = strlen (sqlca.sqlerrm.sqlerrmc);
+}
+
+/* This function returns a newly malloced string that has the ' and \
+ in the argument quoted with \.
+ */
+static
+char *
+quote_postgres(char * arg)
+{
+ char * res = (char *)malloc(2 * strlen(arg) + 1);
+ int i, ri;
+
+ for (i = 0, ri = 0; arg[i]; i++, ri++)
+ {
+ switch (arg[i])
+ {
+ case '\'':
+ case '\\':
+ res[ri++] = '\\';
+ default:
+ ;
+ }
+
+ res[ri] = arg[i];
+ }
+ res[ri] = '\0';
+
+ return res;
+}
+
+
+bool
+ECPGdo(int lineno, char * query, ...)
+{
+ va_list ap;
+ bool status = false;
+ char * copiedquery;
+ PGresult * results;
+ PGnotify * notify;
+ enum ECPGttype type;
+
+ va_start(ap, query);
+
+ sqlca.sqlcode = 0;
+ copiedquery = strdup(query);
+
+ type = va_arg(ap, enum ECPGttype);
+
+ /*
+ * Now, if the type is one of the fill in types then we take the argument
+ * and enter that in the string at the first %s position. Then if there
+ * are any more fill in types we fill in at the next and so on.
+ */
+ while (type != ECPGt_EOIT)
+ {
+ void * value = NULL;
+ short varcharsize;
+ short size;
+ short arrsize;
+
+ char * newcopy;
+ char * mallocedval = NULL;
+ char * tobeinserted = NULL;
+ char * p;
+ char buff[20];
+
+ /* Some special treatment is needed for records since we want their
+ contents to arrive in a comma-separated list on insert (I think). */
+
+ value = va_arg(ap, void *);
+ varcharsize = va_arg(ap, short);
+ size = va_arg(ap, short);
+ arrsize = va_arg(ap, short);
+
+ switch (type) {
+ case ECPGt_char:
+ case ECPGt_short:
+ case ECPGt_int:
+ sprintf(buff, "%d", *(int*)value);
+ tobeinserted = buff;
+ break;
+
+ case ECPGt_unsigned_char:
+ case ECPGt_unsigned_short:
+ case ECPGt_unsigned_int:
+ sprintf(buff, "%d", *(unsigned int*)value);
+ tobeinserted = buff;
+ break;
+
+ case ECPGt_long:
+ sprintf(buff, "%ld", *(long*)value);
+ tobeinserted = buff;
+ break;
+
+ case ECPGt_unsigned_long:
+ sprintf(buff, "%ld", *(unsigned long*)value);
+ tobeinserted = buff;
+ break;
+
+ case ECPGt_float:
+ sprintf(buff, "%.14g", *(float*)value);
+ tobeinserted = buff;
+ break;
+
+ case ECPGt_double:
+ sprintf(buff, "%.14g", *(double*)value);
+ tobeinserted = buff;
+ break;
+
+ case ECPGt_varchar:
+ case ECPGt_varchar2:
+ {
+ struct ECPGgeneric_varchar * var =
+ (struct ECPGgeneric_varchar*)value;
+
+ newcopy = (char *)malloc(var->len + 1);
+ strncpy(newcopy, var->arr, var->len);
+ newcopy[var->len] = '\0';
+
+ mallocedval = (char *)malloc(2 * strlen(newcopy) + 3);
+ strcpy(mallocedval, "'");
+ strcat(mallocedval, quote_postgres(newcopy));
+ strcat(mallocedval, "'");
+
+ free(newcopy);
+
+ tobeinserted = mallocedval;
+ }
+ break;
+
+ default:
+ /* Not implemented yet */
+ register_error(-1, "Unsupported type %s on line %d.",
+ ECPGtype_name(type), lineno);
+ return false;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Now tobeinserted points to an area that is to be inserted at
+ the first %s
+ */
+ newcopy = (char *)malloc(strlen(copiedquery)
+ + strlen(tobeinserted)
+ + 1);
+ strcpy(newcopy, copiedquery);
+ if ((p = strstr(newcopy, ";;")) == NULL)
+ {
+ /* We have an argument but we dont have the matched up string
+ in the string
+ */
+ register_error(-1, "Too many arguments line %d.", lineno);
+ return false;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ strcpy(p, tobeinserted);
+ /* The strange thing in the second argument is the rest of the
+ string from the old string */
+ strcat(newcopy,
+ copiedquery
+ + ( p - newcopy )
+ + 2 /* Length of ;; */);
+ }
+
+ /* Now everything is safely copied to the newcopy. Lets free the
+ oldcopy and let the copiedquery get the value from the newcopy.
+ */
+ if (mallocedval != NULL)
+ {
+ free(mallocedval);
+ mallocedval = NULL;
+ }
+
+ free(copiedquery);
+ copiedquery = newcopy;
+
+ type = va_arg(ap, enum ECPGttype);
+ }
+
+ /* Check if there are unmatched things left. */
+ if (strstr(copiedquery, ";;") != NULL)
+ {
+ register_error(-1, "Too few arguments line %d.", lineno);
+ return false;
+ }
+
+ /* Now then request is built. */
+
+ if (committed)
+ {
+ if ((results = PQexec (simple_connection, "begin")) == NULL) {
+ register_error(-1, "Error starting transaction line %d.", lineno);
+ return false;
+ }
+ PQclear (results);
+ committed = 0;
+ }
+
+ ECPGlog("ECPGdo line %d: QUERY: %s\n", lineno, copiedquery);
+ results = PQexec(simple_connection, copiedquery);
+ free(copiedquery);
+
+ if (results == NULL)
+ {
+ ECPGlog("ECPGdo line %d: error: %s", lineno,
+ PQerrorMessage(simple_connection));
+ register_error(-1, "Postgres error: %s line %d.",
+ PQerrorMessage(simple_connection), lineno);
+ }
+ else switch(PQresultStatus(results))
+ {
+ int m,n,x;
+
+ case PGRES_TUPLES_OK:
+ /* XXX Cheap Hack. For now, we see only the last group
+ * of tuples. This is clearly not the right
+ * way to do things !!
+ */
+
+ m = PQnfields(results);
+ n = PQntuples(results);
+
+ if (n < 1)
+ {
+ ECPGlog("ECPGdo lineno %d: Incorrect number of matches: %d\n",
+ lineno, n);
+ register_error(1, "Data not found line %d.", lineno);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ if (n > 1)
+ {
+ ECPGlog("ECPGdo line %d: Incorrect number of matches: %d\n",
+ lineno, n);
+ register_error(-1, "To many matches line %d.", lineno);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ status = true;
+
+ for (x = 0; x < m && status; x++)
+ {
+ void * value = NULL;
+ short varcharsize;
+ short size;
+ short arrsize;
+
+ char *pval = PQgetvalue(results,0,x);
+ /*long int * res_int;
+ char ** res_charstar;
+ char * res_char;
+ int res_len;*/
+ char * scan_length;
+
+ ECPGlog("ECPGdo line %d: RESULT: %s\n", lineno, pval ? pval : "");
+
+ /* No the pval is a pointer to the value. */
+ /* We will have to decode the value */
+ type = va_arg(ap, enum ECPGttype);
+ value = va_arg(ap, void *);
+ varcharsize = va_arg(ap, short);
+ size = va_arg(ap, short);
+ arrsize = va_arg(ap, short);
+
+ switch (type)
+ {
+ long res;
+ unsigned long ures;
+ double dres;
+
+ case ECPGt_char:
+ case ECPGt_short:
+ case ECPGt_int:
+ case ECPGt_long:
+ if (pval)
+ {
+ res = strtol(pval, &scan_length, 10);
+ if (*scan_length != '\0') /* Garbage left */
+ {
+ register_error(-1, "Not correctly formatted int type: %s line %d.",
+ pval, lineno);
+ status = false;
+ res = 0L;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ res = 0L;
+
+ /* Again?! Yes */
+ switch (type)
+ {
+ case ECPGt_char:
+ *(char *)value = (char)res;
+ break;
+ case ECPGt_short:
+ *(short *)value = (short)res;
+ break;
+ case ECPGt_int:
+ *(int *)value = (int)res;
+ break;
+ case ECPGt_long:
+ *(long *)value = res;
+ break;
+ default:
+ /* Cannot happen */
+ break;
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case ECPGt_unsigned_char:
+ case ECPGt_unsigned_short:
+ case ECPGt_unsigned_int:
+ case ECPGt_unsigned_long:
+ if (pval)
+ {
+ ures = strtoul(pval, &scan_length, 10);
+ if (*scan_length != '\0') /* Garbage left */
+ {
+ register_error(-1, "Not correctly formatted unsigned type: %s line %d.",
+ pval, lineno);
+ status = false;
+ ures = 0L;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ ures = 0L;
+
+ /* Again?! Yes */
+ switch (type)
+ {
+ case ECPGt_unsigned_char:
+ *(unsigned char *)value = (unsigned char)ures;
+ break;
+ case ECPGt_unsigned_short:
+ *(unsigned short *)value = (unsigned short)ures;
+ break;
+ case ECPGt_unsigned_int:
+ *(unsigned int *)value = (unsigned int)ures;
+ break;
+ case ECPGt_unsigned_long:
+ *(unsigned long *)value = ures;
+ break;
+ default:
+ /* Cannot happen */
+ break;
+ }
+ break;
+
+
+ case ECPGt_float:
+ case ECPGt_double:
+ if (pval)
+ {
+ dres = strtod(pval, &scan_length);
+ if (*scan_length != '\0') /* Garbage left */
+ {
+ register_error(-1, "Not correctly formatted floating point type: %s line %d.",
+ pval, lineno);
+ status = false;
+ dres = 0.0;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ dres = 0.0;
+
+ /* Again?! Yes */
+ switch (type)
+ {
+ case ECPGt_float:
+ *(float *)value = (float)res;
+ break;
+ case ECPGt_double:
+ *(double *)value = res;
+ break;
+ default:
+ /* Cannot happen */
+ break;
+ }
+ break;
+
+
+ case ECPGt_varchar:
+ {
+ struct ECPGgeneric_varchar * var =
+ (struct ECPGgeneric_varchar*)value;
+
+ strncpy(var->arr, pval, varcharsize);
+ var->len = strlen(pval);
+ if (var->len > varcharsize)
+ var->len = varcharsize;
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case ECPGt_EORT:
+ ECPGlog("ECPGdo line %d: Too few arguments.\n", lineno);
+ register_error(-1, "Too few arguments line %d.", lineno);
+ status = false;
+ break;
+
+ default:
+ register_error(-1, "Unsupported type %s on line %d.",
+ ECPGtype_name(type), lineno);
+ return false;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+
+ type = va_arg(ap, enum ECPGttype);
+
+ if (status && type != ECPGt_EORT)
+ {
+ register_error(-1, "Too many arguments line %d.", lineno);
+ return false;
+ }
+
+ PQclear(results);
+ break;
+ case PGRES_EMPTY_QUERY:
+ /* do nothing */
+ register_error(-1, "Empty query line %d.", lineno);
+ break;
+ case PGRES_COMMAND_OK:
+ status = true;
+ ECPGlog("ECPGdo line %d Ok: %s\n", lineno, PQcmdStatus(results));
+ break;
+ case PGRES_NONFATAL_ERROR:
+ case PGRES_FATAL_ERROR:
+ case PGRES_BAD_RESPONSE:
+ ECPGlog("ECPGdo line %d: Error: %s",
+ lineno, PQerrorMessage(simple_connection));
+ register_error(-1, "Error: %s line %d.",
+ PQerrorMessage(simple_connection), lineno);
+ break;
+ case PGRES_COPY_OUT:
+ ECPGlog("ECPGdo line %d: Got PGRES_COPY_OUT ... tossing.\n", lineno);
+ PQendcopy(results->conn);
+ break;
+ case PGRES_COPY_IN:
+ ECPGlog("ECPGdo line %d: Got PGRES_COPY_IN ... tossing.\n", lineno);
+ PQendcopy(results->conn);
+ break;
+ default:
+ ECPGlog("ECPGdo line %d: Got something else, postgres error.\n",
+ lineno);
+ register_error(-1, "Postgres error line %d.", lineno);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* check for asynchronous returns */
+ notify = PQnotifies(simple_connection);
+ if (notify) {
+ ECPGlog("ECPGdo line %d: ASYNC NOTIFY of '%s' from backend pid '%d' received\n",
+ lineno, notify->relname, notify->be_pid);
+ free(notify);
+ }
+
+ va_end(ap);
+ return status;
+}
+
+
+bool
+ECPGcommit(int lineno)
+{
+ PGresult *res;
+
+ ECPGlog("ECPGcommit line %d\n", lineno);
+ if ((res = PQexec (simple_connection, "end")) == NULL) {
+ register_error(-1, "Error committing line %d.", lineno);
+ return (FALSE);
+ }
+ PQclear (res);
+ committed = 1;
+ return (TRUE);
+}
+
+bool
+ECPGrollback(int lineno)
+{
+ PGresult *res;
+
+ ECPGlog("ECPGrollback line %d\n", lineno);
+ if ((res = PQexec (simple_connection, "abort")) == NULL) {
+ register_error(-1, "Error rolling back line %d.", lineno);
+ return (FALSE);
+ }
+ PQclear (res);
+ committed = 1;
+ return(TRUE);
+}
+
+
+
+bool
+ECPGsetdb(PGconn * newcon)
+{
+ ECPGfinish();
+ simple_connection = newcon;
+ return true;
+}
+
+bool
+ECPGconnect(const char * dbname)
+{
+ char * name = strdup(dbname);
+ ECPGlog("ECPGconnect: opening database %s\n", name);
+
+ sqlca.sqlcode = 0;
+
+ ECPGsetdb(PQsetdb(NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, name));
+
+ free(name);
+ name = NULL;
+
+ if (PQstatus(simple_connection) == CONNECTION_BAD)
+ {
+ ECPGfinish();
+ ECPGlog("ECPGconnect: could not open database %s\n", dbname);
+ register_error(-1, "ECPGconnect: could not open database %s.", dbname);
+ return false;
+ }
+ return true;
+}
+
+
+bool
+ECPGstatus()
+{
+ return PQstatus(simple_connection) != CONNECTION_BAD;
+}
+
+
+bool
+ECPGfinish()
+{
+ if (simple_connection != NULL)
+ {
+ ECPGlog("ECPGfinish: finishing.\n");
+ PQfinish(simple_connection);
+ }
+ else
+ ECPGlog("ECPGfinish: called an extra time.\n");
+ return true;
+}
+
+void
+ECPGdebug(int n)
+{
+ simple_debug = n;
+ ECPGlog("ECPGdebug: set to %d\n", simple_debug);
+}
+
+void
+ECPGlog(const char * format, ...)
+{
+ va_list ap;
+ if (simple_debug)
+ {
+ char * f = (char *) malloc(strlen(format) + 100);
+
+ sprintf(f, "[%d]: %s", getpid(), format);
+
+ va_start(ap, format);
+ vfprintf(stderr, f, ap);
+ va_end(ap);
+
+ free(f);
+ }
+}
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/lib/typename.c b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/lib/typename.c
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c1789572057
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/lib/typename.c
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+#include <ecpgtype.h>
+/*
+ * This function is used to generate the correct type names.
+ */
+const char *
+ECPGtype_name(enum ECPGttype typ)
+{
+ switch (typ)
+ {
+ case ECPGt_char: return "char";
+ case ECPGt_unsigned_char: return "unsigned char";
+ case ECPGt_short: return "short";
+ case ECPGt_unsigned_short: return "unsigned short";
+ case ECPGt_int: return "int";
+ case ECPGt_unsigned_int: return "unsigned int";
+ case ECPGt_long: return "long";
+ case ECPGt_unsigned_long: return "unsigned long";
+ case ECPGt_float: return "float";
+ case ECPGt_double: return "double";
+ default:
+ abort();
+ }
+}
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/Makefile b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9a53fb1b432
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+# Generated automatically from Makefile.in by configure.
+POSTGRESTOP=@POSTGRESERVER@
+POSTGRES_BIN=$(POSTGRESTOP)/bin
+POSTGRES_LIB=$(POSTGRESTOP)/lib
+
+CC=gcc
+LEX=flex
+LEXLIB=-lfl
+YACC=bison -y
+
+
+CFLAGS=-I../include -O2 -g -Wall
+
+all:: ecpg
+
+clean::
+ rm -f *.o core a.out ecpg y.tab.h y.tab.c *~
+
+install:: all
+ install -c -d -m755 $(POSTGRES_LIB)/ecpg
+ install -c -m555 preproc $(POSTGRES_LIB)/ecpg
+ install -c -m555 ecpg $(POSTGRES_BIN)
+
+uninstall::
+ rm -f $(POSTGRES_BIN)/ecpg
+ rm -f $(POSTGRES_LIB)/ecpg/preproc
+
+# Rule that really do something.
+ecpg: y.tab.o pgc.o type.o ecpg.o
+ $(CC) -g -O2 -Wall -o ecpg y.tab.o pgc.o type.o ecpg.o -L../lib -lecpg $(LEXLIB)
+
+y.tab.h y.tab.c: preproc.y
+ $(YACC) -d $<
+
+y.tab.o : y.tab.h ../include/ecpgtype.h
+type.o : ../include/ecpgtype.h
+pgc.o : ../include/ecpgtype.h
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/Makefile.in b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/Makefile.in
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2dca1341245
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/Makefile.in
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+POSTGRESTOP=@POSTGRESERVER@
+POSTGRES_BIN=$(POSTGRESTOP)/bin
+POSTGRES_LIB=$(POSTGRESTOP)/lib
+
+CC=@CC@
+LEX=@LEX@
+LEXLIB=@LEXLIB@
+YACC=@YACC@
+
+
+CFLAGS=-I../include -O2 -g -Wall
+
+all:: ecpg
+
+clean::
+ rm -f *.o core a.out ecpg y.tab.h y.tab.c *~
+
+install:: all
+ install -c -d -m755 $(POSTGRES_LIB)/ecpg
+ install -c -m555 preproc $(POSTGRES_LIB)/ecpg
+ install -c -m555 ecpg $(POSTGRES_BIN)
+
+uninstall::
+ rm -f $(POSTGRES_BIN)/ecpg
+ rm -f $(POSTGRES_LIB)/ecpg/preproc
+
+# Rule that really do something.
+ecpg: y.tab.o pgc.o type.o ecpg.o
+ $(CC) -g -O2 -Wall -o ecpg y.tab.o pgc.o type.o ecpg.o -L../lib -lecpg $(LEXLIB)
+
+y.tab.h y.tab.c: preproc.y
+ $(YACC) -d $<
+
+y.tab.o : y.tab.h ../include/ecpgtype.h
+type.o : ../include/ecpgtype.h
+pgc.o : ../include/ecpgtype.h
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/ecpg.c b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/ecpg.c
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..31d5d777777
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/ecpg.c
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+/* New main for ecpg, the PostgreSQL embedded SQL precompiler. */
+/* (C) Michael Meskes <meskes@debian.org> Feb 5th, 1998 */
+/* Placed under the same copyright as PostgresSQL */
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+
+extern void lex_init(void);
+int yyparse (void);
+
+int main(int argc, char *argv[])
+{
+ lex_init();
+ fprintf(stdout, "/* These two include files are added by the preprocessor */\n#include <ecpgtype.h>\n#include <ecpglib.h>\n");
+ yyparse();
+ return(0);
+}
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/ecpg.in b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/ecpg.in
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b032cada7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/ecpg.in
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+INFILE=
+OUTFILE=
+
+for arg
+do
+ case "$arg" in
+ iname=*)
+ INFILE=`expr substr $arg 7 1000`
+ ;;
+ oname=*)
+ OUTFILE=`expr substr $arg 7 1000`
+ ;;
+ *)
+ echo Wrong argument $arg
+ exit 1;
+ ;;
+ esac
+done
+
+if [ -n "$INFILE" -a -n "$OUTFILE" ]
+then
+ exec @POSTGRESERVER@/lib/ecpg/preproc < $INFILE > $OUTFILE
+else
+ echo Missing arguments.
+ echo usage: $0 iname=file oname=outfile
+ exit 1;
+fi
+
+exit 0;
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/pgc.l b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/pgc.l
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..857561df9c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/pgc.l
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+/* Copyright comment! */
+%{
+#include "type.h"
+#include "y.tab.h"
+
+#define dbg(arg) fprintf(stderr, "DEBUG: %s\n", #arg);
+%}
+%s C SQL
+ccomment \/\*([^*]|\*[^/]|\*\*[^/])*\*\/
+ws ([ \t\n][ \t\n]*|{ccomment})*
+letter [A-Za-z_]
+digit [0-9]
+length {digit}+
+symbol {letter}({letter}|{digit})*
+string '[^']*'
+
+exec [eE][xX][eE][cC]
+sql [sS][qQ][lL]
+varchar [vV][aA][rR][cC][hH][aA][rR]
+varchar2 [vV][aA][rR][cC][hH][aA][rR]2
+into [iI][nN][tT][oO]
+begin [bB][eE][gG][iI][nN]
+end [eE][nN][dD]
+declare [dD][eE][cC][lL][aA][rR][eE]
+section [sS][eE][cC][tT][iI][oO][nN]
+include [iI][nN][cC][lL][uU][dD][eE]
+connect [cC][oO][nN][nN][eE][cC][tT]
+open [oO][pP][eE][nN]
+commit [cC][oO][mM][mM][iI][tT]
+rollback [rR][oO][lL][lL][bB][aA][cC][kK]
+%%
+<C>{exec}{ws}{sql} { BEGIN SQL; dbg(SQL_START); return SQL_START; }
+<SQL>";" { BEGIN C; dbg(SQL_SEMI); return SQL_SEMI; }
+<SQL>{begin} { dbg(SQL_BEGIN); return SQL_BEGIN; }
+<SQL>{end} { dbg(SQL_END); return SQL_END; }
+<SQL>{declare} { dbg(SQL_DECLARE); return SQL_DECLARE; }
+<SQL>{section} { dbg(SQL_SECTION); return SQL_SECTION; }
+<SQL>{include} { dbg(SQL_INCLUDE); return SQL_INCLUDE; }
+<SQL>{connect} { dbg(SQL_CONNECT); return SQL_CONNECT; }
+<SQL>{open} { dbg(SQL_OPEN); return SQL_OPEN; }
+<SQL>{commit} { dbg(SQL_COMMIT); return SQL_COMMIT; }
+<SQL>{rollback} { dbg(SQL_ROLLBACK); return SQL_ROLLBACK; }
+
+<SQL>{into} { dbg(SQL_INTO); return SQL_INTO; }
+
+{length} { dbg(S_LENGTH); return S_LENGTH; }
+
+{varchar} { dbg(S_VARCHAR); return S_VARCHAR; }
+{varchar2} { dbg(S_VARCHAR2); return S_VARCHAR2; }
+long { dbg(S_LONG); return S_LONG; }
+short { dbg(S_SHORT); return S_SHORT; }
+int { dbg(S_INT); return S_INT; }
+char { dbg(S_CHAR); return S_CHAR; }
+float { dbg(S_FLOAT); return S_FLOAT; }
+double { dbg(S_DOUBLE); return S_DOUBLE; }
+
+{string} { dbg(SQL_STRING); return SQL_STRING; }
+<SQL>{ws} ;
+{symbol} { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+
+<SQL>"!<" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"!>" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"!^" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"!|" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"!~" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"!~*" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"#<" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"#<=" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"#<>" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"#=" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"#>" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"#>=" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"&&" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"&<" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"&>" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"<<" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"<=" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"<===>" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"<>" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"<?>" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"===>" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"===`" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"=|=" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>">=" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>">>" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"@@" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"|/" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"||/" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"~*" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+<SQL>"~=" { dbg(S_SYMBOL); return S_SYMBOL; }
+
+"[" { dbg([); return '['; }
+"]" { dbg(]); return ']'; }
+";" { dbg(;); return ';'; }
+"," { dbg(komma); return ','; }
+
+<SQL>":" { dbg(:); return ':'; }
+
+{ws} { ECHO; }
+. { dbg(.); return S_ANYTHING; }
+%%
+void
+lex_init()
+{
+ BEGIN C;
+}
+
+int yywrap()
+{
+ return 1;
+}
+
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/preproc.y b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/preproc.y
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4d84a81a19e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/preproc.y
@@ -0,0 +1,337 @@
+/* Copyright comment */
+%{
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include "type.h"
+
+void yyerror(char *);
+
+/*
+ * Handling of the variables.
+ */
+/* Since we don't want to keep track of where the functions end we just
+ * have a list of functions that we search in, most reasently defined
+ * function. This won't work if we use block scope for variables with the
+ * same name but different types but in all other cases the c-compiler will
+ * signal an error (hopefully).
+ *
+ * This list is leaked on program exit. This is because I don't think it is
+ * important enough to spend the extra ten minutes to write the function that
+ * deletes it. It would be another thing if I would have written in C++.
+ */
+/* This is a linked list of the variable names and types. */
+struct variable
+{
+ char * name;
+ struct ECPGtype * type;
+ struct variable * next;
+};
+
+static struct variable * allvariables = NULL;
+
+struct variable *
+find_variable(char * name)
+{
+ struct variable * p;
+
+ for (p = allvariables; p; p = p->next)
+ {
+ if (strcmp(p->name, name) == 0)
+ return p;
+ }
+
+ {
+ char * errorstring = (char *) malloc(strlen(name) + 100);
+
+ sprintf(errorstring, "The variabel :%s is not declared.", name);
+
+ yyerror(errorstring);
+ }
+ return NULL;
+}
+
+
+void
+new_variable(const char * name, struct ECPGtype * type)
+{
+ struct variable * p = (struct variable*) malloc(sizeof(struct variable));
+
+ p->name = strdup(name);
+ p->type = type;
+
+ p->next = allvariables;
+ allvariables = p;
+}
+
+
+/*
+ * Here is the variables that need to be handled on every request.
+ * These are of two kinds: input and output.
+ * I will make two lists for them.
+ */
+struct arguments {
+ struct variable * variable;
+ struct arguments * next;
+};
+
+
+static struct arguments * argsinsert = NULL;
+static struct arguments * argsresult = NULL;
+
+void
+reset_variables()
+{
+ argsinsert = NULL;
+ argsresult = NULL;
+}
+
+
+/* Add a variable to a request. */
+void
+add_variable(struct arguments ** list, struct variable * var)
+{
+ struct arguments * p = (struct arguments *)malloc(sizeof(struct arguments));
+ p->variable = var;
+ p->next = *list;
+ *list = p;
+}
+
+
+/* Dump out a list of all the variable on this list.
+ This is a recursive function that works from the end of the list and
+ deletes the list as we go on.
+ */
+void
+dump_variables(struct arguments * list)
+{
+ if (list == NULL)
+ {
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /* The list is build up from the beginning so lets first dump the
+ end of the list:
+ */
+
+ dump_variables(list->next);
+
+ /* Then the current element. */
+ ECPGdump_a_type(stdout, list->variable->name, list->variable->type);
+
+ /* Then release the list element. */
+ free(list);
+}
+
+
+extern FILE * yyout;
+extern char * yytext;
+extern int yyleng;
+%}
+
+%union {
+ int tagname;
+ struct ECPGtemp_type type;
+ char * symbolname;
+ int indexsize;
+ enum ECPGttype type_enum;
+}
+
+%token <tagname> SQL_START SQL_SEMI SQL_STRING SQL_INTO
+%token <tagname> SQL_BEGIN SQL_END SQL_DECLARE SQL_SECTION SQL_INCLUDE
+%token <tagname> SQL_CONNECT SQL_OPEN
+%token <tagname> SQL_COMMIT SQL_ROLLBACK
+
+%token <tagname> S_SYMBOL S_LENGTH S_ANYTHING
+%token <tagname> S_VARCHAR S_VARCHAR2
+%token <tagname> S_EXTERN S_STATIC
+%token <tagname> S_UNSIGNED S_SIGNED
+%token <tagname> S_LONG S_SHORT S_INT S_CHAR S_FLOAT S_DOUBLE
+%token <tagname> '[' ']' ';' ','
+
+%type <type> type type_detailed varchar_type simple_type
+%type <symbolname> symbol
+%type <tagname> maybe_storage_clause varchar_tag
+%type <type_enum> simple_tag
+%type <indexsize> index length
+%type <tagname> canything sqlanything both_anything
+
+
+%%
+prog : statements;
+
+statements : /* empty */
+ | statements statement;
+
+statement : sqldeclaration
+ | sqlinclude
+ | sqlconnect
+ | sqlopen
+ | sqlcommit
+ | sqlrollback
+ | sqlstatement
+ | cthing;
+
+sqldeclaration : sql_startdeclare
+ variable_declarations
+ sql_enddeclare;
+
+sql_startdeclare : SQL_START SQL_BEGIN SQL_DECLARE SQL_SECTION SQL_SEMI {
+ printf("/* exec sql begin declare section */\n");
+};
+sql_enddeclare : SQL_START SQL_END SQL_DECLARE SQL_SECTION SQL_SEMI {
+ printf("/* exec sql end declare section */\n");
+};
+
+variable_declarations : /* empty */
+ | variable_declarations variable_declaration ;
+
+/* Here is where we can enter support for typedef. */
+variable_declaration : type ';' {
+ new_variable($<type>1.name, $<type>1.typ);
+ free($<type>1.name);
+ fprintf(yyout, ";");
+}
+
+symbol : S_SYMBOL {
+ char * name = (char *)malloc(yyleng + 1);
+
+ strncpy(name, yytext, yyleng);
+ name[yyleng] = '\0';
+
+ $<symbolname>$ = name;
+}
+
+type : maybe_storage_clause type_detailed { $<type>$ = $<type>2; };
+type_detailed : varchar_type { $<type>$ = $<type>1; }
+ | simple_type { $<type>$ = $<type>1; };
+
+varchar_type : varchar_tag symbol index {
+ fprintf(yyout, "struct varchar_%s { int len; char arr[%d]; } %s", $<symbolname>2, $<indexsize>3, $<symbolname>2);
+ $<type>$.name = $<symbolname>2;
+ $<type>$.typ = ECPGmake_varchar_type(ECPGt_varchar, $<indexsize>3);
+}
+
+varchar_tag : S_VARCHAR { $<tagname>$ = $<tagname>1; }
+ | S_VARCHAR2 { $<tagname>$ = $<tagname>1; };
+
+simple_type : simple_tag symbol {
+ fprintf(yyout, "%s %s", ECPGtype_name($<type_enum>1), $<symbolname>2);
+ $<type>$.name = $<symbolname>2;
+ $<type>$.typ = ECPGmake_simple_type($<type_enum>1);
+}
+
+simple_tag : S_CHAR { $<type_enum>$ = ECPGt_char; }
+ | S_UNSIGNED S_CHAR { $<type_enum>$ = ECPGt_unsigned_char; }
+ | S_SHORT { $<type_enum>$ = ECPGt_short; }
+ | S_UNSIGNED S_SHORT { $<type_enum>$ = ECPGt_unsigned_short; }
+ | S_INT { $<type_enum>$ = ECPGt_int; }
+ | S_UNSIGNED S_INT { $<type_enum>$ = ECPGt_unsigned_int; }
+ | S_LONG { $<type_enum>$ = ECPGt_long; }
+ | S_UNSIGNED S_LONG { $<type_enum>$ = ECPGt_unsigned_long; }
+ | S_FLOAT { $<type_enum>$ = ECPGt_float; }
+ | S_DOUBLE { $<type_enum>$ = ECPGt_double; };
+
+maybe_storage_clause : S_EXTERN { fwrite(yytext, yyleng, 1, yyout); }
+ | S_STATIC { fwrite(yytext, yyleng, 1, yyout); }
+ | /* empty */ { };
+
+index : '[' length ']' {
+ $<indexsize>$ = $<indexsize>2;
+};
+
+length : S_LENGTH { $<indexsize>$ = atoi(yytext); }
+
+sqlinclude : SQL_START SQL_INCLUDE { fprintf(yyout, "#include \""); }
+ filename SQL_SEMI { fprintf(yyout, ".h\""); };
+
+filename : cthing
+ | filename cthing;
+
+sqlconnect : SQL_START SQL_CONNECT { fprintf(yyout, "ECPGconnect(\""); }
+ SQL_STRING { fwrite(yytext + 1, yyleng - 2, 1, yyout); }
+ SQL_SEMI { fprintf(yyout, "\");"); };
+
+/* Open is an open cursor. Removed. */
+sqlopen : SQL_START SQL_OPEN sqlgarbage SQL_SEMI { };
+
+sqlgarbage : /* Empty */
+ | sqlgarbage sqlanything;
+
+
+sqlcommit : SQL_START SQL_COMMIT SQL_SEMI {
+ fprintf(yyout, "ECPGcommit(__LINE__);");
+};
+sqlrollback : SQL_START SQL_ROLLBACK SQL_SEMI {
+ fprintf(yyout, "ECPGrollback(__LINE__);");
+};
+
+sqlstatement : SQL_START { /* Reset stack */
+ reset_variables();
+ fprintf(yyout, "ECPGdo(__LINE__, \"");
+}
+ sqlstatement_words
+ SQL_SEMI {
+ /* Dump */
+ fprintf(yyout, "\", ");
+ dump_variables(argsinsert);
+ fprintf(yyout, "ECPGt_EOIT, ");
+ dump_variables(argsresult);
+ fprintf(yyout, "ECPGt_EORT );");
+};
+
+sqlstatement_words : sqlstatement_word
+ | sqlstatement_words sqlstatement_word;
+
+sqlstatement_word : ':' symbol
+ {
+ add_variable(&argsinsert, find_variable($2));
+ fprintf(yyout, " ;; ");
+ }
+ | SQL_INTO into_list { }
+ | sqlanything
+ {
+ fwrite(yytext, yyleng, 1, yyout);
+ fwrite(" ", 1, 1, yyout);
+ }
+ | SQL_INTO sqlanything
+ {
+ fprintf(yyout, " into ");
+ fwrite(yytext, yyleng, 1, yyout);
+ fwrite(" ", 1, 1, yyout);
+ };
+
+into_list : ':' symbol {
+ add_variable(&argsresult, find_variable($2));
+}
+ | into_list ',' ':' symbol{
+ add_variable(&argsresult, find_variable($4));
+};
+
+cthing : canything {
+ fwrite(yytext, yyleng, 1, yyout);
+}
+
+canything : both_anything
+ | SQL_INTO
+ | ';';
+
+sqlanything : both_anything;
+
+both_anything : S_LENGTH | S_VARCHAR | S_VARCHAR2
+ | S_LONG | S_SHORT | S_INT | S_CHAR | S_FLOAT | S_DOUBLE
+ | SQL_OPEN | SQL_CONNECT
+ | SQL_STRING
+ | SQL_BEGIN | SQL_END
+ | SQL_DECLARE | SQL_SECTION
+ | SQL_INCLUDE
+ | S_SYMBOL
+ | '[' | ']' | ','
+ | S_ANYTHING;
+
+%%
+void yyerror(char * error)
+{
+ fprintf(stderr, "%s\n", error);
+ exit(1);
+}
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/type.c b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/type.c
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a54cbd801db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/type.c
@@ -0,0 +1,283 @@
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+#include "type.h"
+
+/* Constructors
+ Yes, I mostly write c++-code
+ */
+
+/* The NAME argument is copied. The type argument is preserved as a pointer. */
+struct ECPGrecord_member *
+ECPGmake_record_member(char * name, struct ECPGtype * type)
+{
+ struct ECPGrecord_member * ne =
+ (struct ECPGrecord_member *)malloc(sizeof(struct ECPGrecord_member));
+
+ ne->name = strdup(name);
+ ne->typ = type;
+
+ return ne;
+}
+
+struct ECPGtype *
+ECPGmake_simple_type(enum ECPGttype typ)
+{
+ struct ECPGtype * ne = (struct ECPGtype *)malloc(sizeof(struct ECPGtype));
+
+ ne->typ = typ;
+ ne->size = 0;
+ ne->u.element = 0;
+
+ return ne;
+}
+
+struct ECPGtype *
+ECPGmake_varchar_type(enum ECPGttype typ, unsigned short siz)
+{
+ struct ECPGtype * ne = ECPGmake_simple_type(typ);
+
+ ne->size = siz;
+
+ return ne;
+}
+
+struct ECPGtype *
+ECPGmake_array_type(struct ECPGtype * typ, unsigned short siz)
+{
+ struct ECPGtype * ne = ECPGmake_simple_type(ECPGt_array);
+
+ ne->size = siz;
+ ne->u.element = typ;
+
+ return ne;
+}
+
+struct ECPGtype *
+ECPGmake_record_type(struct ECPGrecord_member * rm[])
+{
+ struct ECPGtype * ne = ECPGmake_simple_type(ECPGt_record);
+
+ ne->u.members = rm;
+
+ return ne;
+}
+
+
+/* Dump a type.
+ The type is dumped as:
+ type-tag <comma> - enum ECPGttype
+ reference-to-variable <comma> - void *
+ size <comma> - short size of this field (if varchar)
+ arrsize <comma> - short number of elements in the arr
+ offset <comma> - short offset to the next element
+ Where:
+ type-tag is one of the simple types or varchar.
+ reference-to-variable can be a reference to a struct element.
+ arrsize is the size of the array in case of array fetches. Otherwise 0.
+ size is the maxsize in case it is a varchar. Otherwise it is the size of
+ the variable (required to do array fetches of records).
+ */
+void ECPGdump_a_simple(FILE * o, const char * name, enum ECPGttype typ,
+ short varcharsize,
+ unsigned short arrsiz, const char * siz);
+void ECPGdump_a_record(FILE * o, const char * name, unsigned short arrsiz,
+ struct ECPGtype * typ, const char * offset);
+
+
+void
+ECPGdump_a_type(FILE * o, const char * name, struct ECPGtype * typ)
+{
+ if (IS_SIMPLE_TYPE(typ->typ))
+ {
+ ECPGdump_a_simple(o, name, typ->typ, typ->size, 0, 0);
+ }
+ else if (typ->typ == ECPGt_array)
+ {
+ if (IS_SIMPLE_TYPE(typ->u.element->typ))
+ ECPGdump_a_simple(o, name, typ->u.element->typ,
+ typ->u.element->size, typ->size, 0);
+ else if (typ->u.element->typ == ECPGt_array)
+ {
+ abort(); /* Array of array, */
+ }
+ else if (typ->u.element->typ == ECPGt_record)
+ {
+ /* Array of records. */
+ ECPGdump_a_record(o, name, typ->size, typ->u.element, 0);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ abort();
+ }
+ }
+ else if (typ->typ == ECPGt_record)
+ {
+ ECPGdump_a_record(o, name, 0, typ, 0);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ abort();
+ }
+}
+
+
+/* If siz is NULL, then the offset is 0, if not use siz as a
+ string, it represents the offset needed if we are in an array of records. */
+void
+ECPGdump_a_simple(FILE * o, const char * name, enum ECPGttype typ,
+ short varcharsize,
+ unsigned short arrsiz,
+ const char * siz)
+{
+ switch (typ)
+ {
+ case ECPGt_char:
+ fprintf(o, "ECPGt_char,&%s,0,%d,%s, ", name, arrsiz,
+ siz == NULL ? "sizeof(char)" : siz);
+ break;
+ case ECPGt_unsigned_char:
+ fprintf(o, "ECPGt_unsigned_char,&%s,0,%d,%s, ", name, arrsiz,
+ siz == NULL ? "sizeof(unsigned char)" : siz);
+ break;
+ case ECPGt_short:
+ fprintf(o, "ECPGt_short,&%s,0,%d,%s, ", name, arrsiz,
+ siz == NULL ? "sizeof(short)" : siz);
+ break;
+ case ECPGt_unsigned_short:
+ fprintf(o,
+ "ECPGt_unsigned_short,&%s,0,%d,%s, ", name, arrsiz,
+ siz == NULL ? "sizeof(unsigned short)" : siz);
+ break;
+ case ECPGt_int:
+ fprintf(o, "ECPGt_int,&%s,0,%d,%s, ", name, arrsiz,
+ siz == NULL ? "sizeof(int)" : siz);
+ break;
+ case ECPGt_unsigned_int:
+ fprintf(o, "ECPGt_unsigned_int,&%s,0,%d,%s, ", name, arrsiz,
+ siz == NULL ? "sizeof(unsigned int)" : siz);
+ break;
+ case ECPGt_long:
+ fprintf(o, "ECPGt_long,&%s,0,%d,%s, ", name, arrsiz,
+ siz == NULL ? "sizeof(long)" : siz);
+ break;
+ case ECPGt_unsigned_long:
+ fprintf(o, "ECPGt_unsigned_int,&%s,0,%d,%s, ", name, arrsiz,
+ siz == NULL ? "sizeof(unsigned int)" : siz);
+ break;
+ case ECPGt_float:
+ fprintf(o, "ECPGt_float,&%s,0,%d,%s, ", name, arrsiz,
+ siz == NULL ? "sizeof(float)" : siz);
+ break;
+ case ECPGt_double:
+ fprintf(o, "ECPGt_double,&%s,0,%d,%s, ", name, arrsiz,
+ siz == NULL ? "sizeof(double)" : siz);
+ break;
+ case ECPGt_varchar:
+ case ECPGt_varchar2:
+ if (siz == NULL)
+ fprintf(o, "ECPGt_varchar,&%s,%d,%d,sizeof(struct varchar_%s), ",
+ name,
+ varcharsize,
+ arrsiz, name);
+ else
+ fprintf(o, "ECPGt_varchar,&%s,%d,%d,%s, ",
+ name,
+ varcharsize,
+ arrsiz, siz);
+ break;
+ default:
+ abort();
+ }
+}
+
+
+/* Penetrate a record and dump the contents. */
+void
+ECPGdump_a_record(FILE * o,
+ const char * name, unsigned short arrsiz,
+ struct ECPGtype * typ, const char * offsetarg)
+{
+ /* If offset is NULL, then this is the first recursive level. If not then
+ we are in a record in a record and the offset is used as offset.
+ */
+ struct ECPGrecord_member ** p;
+ char obuf[BUFSIZ];
+ char buf[BUFSIZ];
+ const char * offset;
+
+ if (offsetarg == NULL)
+ {
+ sprintf(obuf, "sizeof(%s)", name);
+ offset = obuf;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ offset = offsetarg;
+ }
+
+ for (p = typ->u.members; *p; p++)
+ {
+ if (IS_SIMPLE_TYPE((*p)->typ->typ))
+ {
+ sprintf(buf, "%s.%s", name, (*p)->name);
+ ECPGdump_a_simple(o, buf, (*p)->typ->typ, (*p)->typ->size,
+ arrsiz, offset);
+ }
+ else if ((*p)->typ->typ == ECPGt_array)
+ {
+ int i;
+
+ for (i = 0; i < (*p)->typ->size; i++)
+ {
+ if (IS_SIMPLE_TYPE((*p)->typ->u.element->typ))
+ {
+ sprintf(buf, "%s.%s[%d]", name, (*p)->name, i);
+ ECPGdump_a_simple(o, buf, (*p)->typ->typ, (*p)->typ->size,
+ arrsiz, offset);
+ }
+ else if((*p)->typ->u.element->typ == ECPGt_array)
+ {
+ /* Array within an array. NOT implemented yet. */
+ abort();
+ }
+ else if ((*p)->typ->u.element->typ == ECPGt_record)
+ {
+ /* Record within array within record. NOT implemented yet. */
+ abort();
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Unknown type */
+ abort();
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ else if ((*p)->typ->typ == ECPGt_record)
+ {
+ /* Record within a record */
+ sprintf(buf, "%s.%s", name, (*p)->name);
+ ECPGdump_a_record(o, buf, arrsiz, (*p)->typ, offset);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Unknown type */
+ abort();
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+
+/* Freeing is not really that important. Since we throw away the process
+ anyway. Lets implement that last! */
+
+void
+ECPGfree_record_member(struct ECPGrecord_member * rm)
+{
+}
+
+void
+ECPGfree_type(struct ECPGtype * typ)
+{
+}
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/type.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/type.h
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6726683bd58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/preproc/type.h
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+#include <ecpgtype.h>
+
+struct ECPGtype;
+struct ECPGrecord_member {
+ char * name;
+ struct ECPGtype * typ;
+};
+struct ECPGtype {
+ enum ECPGttype typ;
+ unsigned short size; /* For array it is the number of elements.
+ * For varchar it is the maxsize of the area.
+ */
+ union {
+ struct ECPGtype * element; /* For an array this is the type of the
+ * element */
+
+ struct ECPGrecord_member ** members;
+ /* A pointer to an array of members. */
+ } u;
+};
+
+/* Everything is malloced. */
+struct ECPGrecord_member * ECPGmake_record_member(char *, struct ECPGtype *);
+struct ECPGtype * ECPGmake_simple_type(enum ECPGttype);
+struct ECPGtype * ECPGmake_varchar_type(enum ECPGttype, unsigned short);
+struct ECPGtype * ECPGmake_array_type(struct ECPGtype *, unsigned short);
+struct ECPGtype * ECPGmake_record_type(struct ECPGrecord_member *[]);
+
+/* Frees a type. */
+void ECPGfree_record_member(struct ECPGrecord_member *);
+void ECPGfree_type(struct ECPGtype *);
+
+/* Dump a type.
+ The type is dumped as:
+ type-tag <comma> reference-to-variable <comma> arrsize <comma> size <comma>
+ Where:
+ type-tag is one of the simple types or varchar.
+ reference-to-variable can be a reference to a struct element.
+ arrsize is the size of the array in case of array fetches. Otherwise 0.
+ size is the maxsize in case it is a varchar. Otherwise it is the size of
+ the variable (required to do array fetches of records).
+ */
+void ECPGdump_a_type(FILE *, const char * name, struct ECPGtype *);
+
+/* A simple struct to keep a variable and its type. */
+struct ECPGtemp_type {
+ struct ECPGtype * typ;
+ const char * name;
+};
+
+extern const char * ECPGtype_name(enum ECPGttype typ);
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/Makefile b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9302d554379
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+test2: test2.c
+ gcc -g -I ../include -I ../../../libpq -o test2 test2.c ../lib/libecpg.a ../../../libpq/libpq.a -lcrypt
+test2.c: test2.qc
+ ../preproc/ecpg < test2.qc > test2.c
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/Ptest1.c b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/Ptest1.c
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5aee48e7d5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/Ptest1.c
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+/* These two include files are added by the preprocessor */
+#include <ecpgtype.h>
+#include <ecpglib.h>
+/* exec sql begin declare section */
+
+ /* VARSIZE */struct varchar_uid { int len; char arr[200]; } uid;
+ struct varchar_name { int len; char arr[200]; } name;
+ short value;
+/* exec sql end declare section */
+
+
+#include "sqlca.h"
+
+#define DBCP(x,y) strcpy(x.arr,y);x.len = strlen(x.arr)
+#define LENFIX(x) x.len=strlen(x.arr)
+#define STRFIX(x) x.arr[x.len]='\0'
+#define SQLCODE sqlca.sqlcode
+
+void
+db_error (char *msg)
+{
+ sqlca.sqlerrm.sqlerrmc[sqlca.sqlerrm.sqlerrml] = '\0';
+ printf ("%s: db error %s\n", msg, sqlca.sqlerrm.sqlerrmc);
+ exit (1);
+}
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+ strcpy (uid.arr, "test/test");
+ LENFIX (uid);
+
+ ECPGconnect("kom");
+ if (SQLCODE)
+ db_error ("connect");
+
+ strcpy (name.arr, "opt1");
+ LENFIX (name);
+
+ ECPGdo(__LINE__, "declare cur cursor for select name , value from pace_test ", ECPGt_EOIT, ECPGt_EORT );
+ if (SQLCODE) db_error ("declare");
+
+
+ if (SQLCODE)
+ db_error ("open");
+
+ while (1) {
+ ECPGdo(__LINE__, "fetch in cur ", ECPGt_EOIT, ECPGt_varchar,&name,200,0,sizeof(struct varchar_name), ECPGt_short,&value,0,0,sizeof(short), ECPGt_EORT );
+ if (SQLCODE)
+ break;
+ STRFIX (name);
+ printf ("%s\t%d\n", name.arr, value);
+ }
+
+ if (SQLCODE < 0)
+ db_error ("fetch");
+
+ ECPGdo(__LINE__, "close cur ", ECPGt_EOIT, ECPGt_EORT );
+ if (SQLCODE) db_error ("close");
+ ECPGcommit(__LINE__);
+ if (SQLCODE) db_error ("commit");
+
+ return (0);
+}
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/test1.c b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/test1.c
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..68d9dd53981
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/test1.c
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+exec sql begin declare section;
+VARCHAR uid[200 /* VARSIZE */];
+varchar name[200];
+short value;
+exec sql end declare section;
+
+exec sql include sqlca;
+
+#define DBCP(x,y) strcpy(x.arr,y);x.len = strlen(x.arr)
+#define LENFIX(x) x.len=strlen(x.arr)
+#define STRFIX(x) x.arr[x.len]='\0'
+#define SQLCODE sqlca.sqlcode
+
+void
+db_error (char *msg)
+{
+ sqlca.sqlerrm.sqlerrmc[sqlca.sqlerrm.sqlerrml] = '\0';
+ printf ("%s: db error %s\n", msg, sqlca.sqlerrm.sqlerrmc);
+ exit (1);
+}
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+ strcpy (uid.arr, "test/test");
+ LENFIX (uid);
+
+ exec sql connect 'kom';
+ if (SQLCODE)
+ db_error ("connect");
+
+ strcpy (name.arr, "opt1");
+ LENFIX (name);
+
+ exec sql declare cur cursor for
+ select name, value from pace_test;
+ if (SQLCODE) db_error ("declare");
+
+ exec sql open cur;
+ if (SQLCODE)
+ db_error ("open");
+
+ while (1) {
+ exec sql fetch in cur into :name, :value;
+ if (SQLCODE)
+ break;
+ STRFIX (name);
+ printf ("%s\t%d\n", name.arr, value);
+ }
+
+ if (SQLCODE < 0)
+ db_error ("fetch");
+
+ exec sql close cur;
+ if (SQLCODE) db_error ("close");
+ exec sql commit;
+ if (SQLCODE) db_error ("commit");
+
+ return (0);
+}
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/test2 b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/test2
new file mode 100755
index 00000000000..34b86808cd0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/test2
Binary files differ
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/test2.c b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/test2.c
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5f22afb7990
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/test2.c
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+/* These two include files are added by the preprocessor */
+#include <ecpgtype.h>
+#include <ecpglib.h>
+#include "sqlca.h"
+
+#define SQLCODE sqlca.sqlcode
+
+void
+db_error (char *msg)
+{
+ sqlca.sqlerrm.sqlerrmc[sqlca.sqlerrm.sqlerrml] = '\0';
+ printf ("%s: db error %s\n", msg, sqlca.sqlerrm.sqlerrmc);
+ exit (1);
+}
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+/* exec sql begin declare section */
+
+ struct varchar_text { int len; char arr[8]; } text;
+/* exec sql end declare section */
+
+
+ ECPGconnect("mm");
+ if (SQLCODE)
+ db_error ("connect");
+
+ ECPGdo(__LINE__, "declare cur cursor for select text from test ", ECPGt_EOIT, ECPGt_EORT );
+ if (SQLCODE) db_error ("declare");
+
+
+ if (SQLCODE)
+ db_error ("open");
+
+ while (1) {
+ ECPGdo(__LINE__, "fetch in cur ", ECPGt_EOIT, ECPGt_varchar,&text,8,0,sizeof(struct varchar_text), ECPGt_EORT );
+ if (SQLCODE)
+ break;
+ printf ("%8.8s\n", text.arr);
+ }
+
+ if (SQLCODE < 0)
+ db_error ("fetch");
+
+ ECPGdo(__LINE__, "close cur ", ECPGt_EOIT, ECPGt_EORT );
+ if (SQLCODE) db_error ("close");
+ ECPGcommit(__LINE__);
+ if (SQLCODE) db_error ("commit");
+
+ return (0);
+}
diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/test2.qc b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/test2.qc
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2652d3418d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/src/test/test2.qc
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+exec sql include sqlca;
+
+#define SQLCODE sqlca.sqlcode
+
+void
+db_error (char *msg)
+{
+ sqlca.sqlerrm.sqlerrmc[sqlca.sqlerrm.sqlerrml] = '\0';
+ printf ("%s: db error %s\n", msg, sqlca.sqlerrm.sqlerrmc);
+ exit (1);
+}
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+exec sql begin declare section;
+varchar text[8];
+exec sql end declare section;
+
+ exec sql connect 'mm';
+ if (SQLCODE)
+ db_error ("connect");
+
+ exec sql declare cur cursor for
+ select text from test;
+ if (SQLCODE) db_error ("declare");
+
+ exec sql open cur;
+ if (SQLCODE)
+ db_error ("open");
+
+ while (1) {
+ exec sql fetch in cur into :text;
+ if (SQLCODE)
+ break;
+ printf ("%8.8s\n", text.arr);
+ }
+
+ if (SQLCODE < 0)
+ db_error ("fetch");
+
+ exec sql close cur;
+ if (SQLCODE) db_error ("close");
+ exec sql commit;
+ if (SQLCODE) db_error ("commit");
+
+ return (0);
+}